Home

Bunn 41343 Coffeemaker User Manual

1. Your vehicle has a remote negative ground location as shown in the illustration It is located between the battery and the underhood fuse block You should always use this remote ground location instead of the terminal on the battery 5 44 Notice lf you connect a negative cable to the ECM ECM mounting bracket or any cables that attach to the ECM bracket you may damage the ECM Always attach the negative cable to your vehicle s remote negative ground location instead of the ECM ECM bracket or any cables attached to the ECM bracket A CAUTION An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan A CAUTION Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light A CAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first
2. 5 3 111 Care of Your CD and DVD Player 3 113 Care of Your CDs and DVDs e 3 113 Diversity Antenna System eeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 114 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manta soian nnega 3 98 Audio System s cont Radio With CD cs icccaccnassccstastcecisetsnrancsactesiat 3 82 Setting the TiMe erssiiiisres istiniti 3 81 Theft Deterrent Feature seeeeeeneee ees 3 111 Understanding Radio Reception 3 112 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 114 Automatic Transmission PUIG x sudececetetietitvecbamateant we E 5 25 Operatie e eee a ENR 2 26 Battery oon a a eels 5 42 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver 05 3 19 Before Leaving on a Long Trip eeeeeee 4 36 Brake Anti Lock Brake System ABS o ae 4 7 Emergencies s sitsiesceiesetscaedececiiedadendtalA 4 8 Panic ASSiSt anorani epa T 4 11 Parking eleaatide dpe aa 2 29 System Warning Light eseeeeeeeneeeeeeee 3 38 Brake Pedal Throttle cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 24 Biako So cieee E A E 5 39 Braking aistean e a E ESE 4 6 Braking in Emergencies ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 8 Break In New Vehicle cccccceseeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 50 Halogen BUDS riei raoa eiea 5 51 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 50 Buying New TireS cssisrrinisn tisn
3. cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 2 4 OY E an Seatac denen ates aes Neotel ewes 2 3 Labelling Tire Sidewall c eeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 54 Lamps Exterior Lighting Battery Saver 3 19 FOG oere tek it wieede eesti N EEN 3 18 Reading ctascutamiiwadtecatinastmcuatacwenmcnstaneense sneer 3 20 LATCH System Child Restraints cccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 39 Level Control cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneees 4 51 Liftgate POWGEM 2 icesd5ei sis isi Hated des eee Ms teats 2 12 Light Airbag Readiness 0 ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 3 37 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 00 3 39 Brake System Warning seeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 38 Charging SySteMzse steccc ctieess aaeei ieis 3 38 Light cont Cruise Control cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeneees 3 46 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning 3 40 Fog Lamp dincer ia a i TERNE EEE iE 3 46 Highbeam ON siede senienas ra ninnan 3 47 Lights On Reminder eeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 3 46 Malfunction Indicator eeceeeeeeeeeee eee tenes 3 42 Oil Pressure Ssscc sescdestsversishi eee ele 3 45 Safety Belt Reminder c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 36 SOCUNLY tiheceseidiwinas saw endelndesodetidondedetegecuecs 3 46 Sport Mode eisercice a 3 45 TCS Warning Light aaeeea 3 40 Tire PYOSSUPC sivcsictan stb needatdivoldeneetecsetbes vanes 3 41 Traction Control System T
4. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een ees 4 9 Control System Warning Light 008 3 40 Limited Slip Rear Axle a ioa 4 10 Magnetic Ride Control ceeeeeeeeeee eee ees 4 10 StabiliTrak System ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 11 Transmission Fluid Automatic cccccec cece eeeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 25 Transmission Operation Automatic 2 26 Trip Odometers aerruas ce ees nee 3 35 Turn and Lane Change Signals cceeeeeees 3 8 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ceeeeeeeeeee es 3 7 U Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 3 20 Understanding Radio Reception 0 3 112 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ccceeeeeeeeee ee 5 68 Universal Home Remote System 0 ee 2 42 Operation esperien ierit eiieeii 2 42 Vehicle CONWOL case sien fice ccetcceeternadscseeoa te E AEA 4 5 Damage WarningS eisimirce iv Loading sasaina neroian otoreke nwa cencedine 4 45 SYMDOIS c ascisacsnedynedennctvnncnuignesnengendascarceneyecteds iv Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data RECOrdETS rered irean aa eet eeeeteeeeaeeaeenes 7 10 Vehicle Identification Number VIN ieina dnai 5 95 Service Parts Identification Label 5 95 Vehicle Personalization ccceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 2 52 DIC eratan e a E REEN 3 66 Memory Seat and Mirrors ssssssssesesesrseereene 2 52 Ventilation Adjustment ceceeeee
5. 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord For the 3 6L V6 engines the cord is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle in front of the fuse block For the 4 6L V8 engine remove the engine compartment beauty cover and the cord is located on the driver s side of the vehicle above the strut You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 25 Automatic Transmission Operation The shift lever is located on the center console between A CAUTION the front seats
6. the longer the delay The windshield wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work GED Low Speed Put the lever in this position for slow steady wiping cycles BR High Speed Put the lever in this position for rapid wiping cycles If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds while you are driving the exterior lamps will come on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3 16 for more information Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them If the blades do become damaged install new blades or blade inserts For more information see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 51 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload Windshield Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision The windshield washer button is located at the end of the windshield wiper lever W Washer Fluid Press the button with this symbol located at the end of the windshield washer lever to wash the windshield Washer fluid will squirt onto the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles to clear the windshield For more wash cy
7. In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 26 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often k If you drive regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change I Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oi
8. Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if someone plans to drive It is a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things e The amount of alcohol consumed e The drinker s body weight e The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking e The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 Ib 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would
9. cable to the positive 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run terminal of the dead battery Use a remote the engine for a while positive terminal if the vehicle has one 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery 7 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs the positive terminal of the good battery Use a service remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Notice If the jumper cables are connected or 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may negative terminal of the good battery Use a occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would remote negative terminal if the vehicle not be covered by your warranty Always connect has one and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal 5 46 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good B
10. cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eens Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Exterior Lamps Lenses Fabhic Carpet iraou nia i aane Finish Care sccscscseeccevededcinsiverateeeaceuceeeeisieet Inside of Your Vehicle Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUMAGCES 25556 irranga EEE Ea ERER beather pisiri iea a tenable Speaker Covers EE E E PE E E EA E Underbody Maintenance Washing Your Vehicle asessneceesnenernsrnrnreen WeathersttipsS secinercireria tispene ian Windshield and Wiper Blades 0 Wood Panels eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Climate Control System Air Filter Passenger Compartment 3 32 Dual 4 iteecssaxdenciineninnsetyeedestewtehs awit E 3 25 Outlet Adjustment cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 3 30 Rear Air Conditioning System cceeeeeeee 3 31 Collision Damage Repair eceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 7 11 Comfort Guides Rear Safety Belt 0 0 0 1 26 Compact Spare Tire ceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee een eeaes 5 86 Control of a Vehicle 1 2 0 0 cececeeeeeeeeeeeea eee odara 4 5 Convenience Net ceceeeeeeeeeneeeeea eee eeaeeaes 2 48 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage eeeeeeeeneee ees 3 41 Engine Temperature Warning Light 3 40 Heater Engine cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 25 Surge Tank Pressure Cap ceeeeeeeeeeeee eres 5 29 Cooling System seisis ser ern a ei 5 32 Cruise C
11. e Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 CAUTION Continued 5 53 Winter Tires If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads often you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle All season tires provide good overall performance on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you would like or the same level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection Also see Buying New Tires on page 5 66 If you choose to use winter tires e Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions e Use only radial ply tires of the same size load range and speed rating as the original equipment tires Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H V W and ZR speed rated tires If you choose winter tires with a lower speed rating never exceed the tire s maximum speed capability 5 54 Tire Sidewall Labelling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall ES 4109 MS S Z lt 2si60R 16 9 gt s Q o DOT MaLaano oy a ay Bayo xme oo X a v o Pa Nouv ogee Passenger P Metric Tire
12. AUTO Automatic Turn the control to this position to put the headlamps in automatic mode AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle 3 16 500 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following e Sidemarker Lamps e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights AD Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights Wiper Activated Headlamps This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for about six seconds For this feature to work the exterior lamp control must be in AUTO When the exterior lamp control is off or in the parking lamp position and the windshield wiper control is in any position except off the Headlamps Suggested message will appear on the DIC display See Headlamps Suggested Message under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information When the ignition is turned to OFF the wiper activated headlamps will immediately turn off They will also turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off Headlamps on Reminder A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position and the driver s door is opened with the ignition off See Lights On Reminder
13. Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Channel Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned available Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info Artist Name Feature No artist information is available at this time on this channel not available The system is working properly No Title Info Song Program Title No song title information is available at this time on this not available channel The system is working properly 3 91 XM Radio Messages cont d Radio Display No CAT Info Category Name No category information is available at this time on this not available channel The system is working properly Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category the chosen category The system is working properly No Information No Text Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time message available on this channel The system is working properly XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your GM dealer XM Radio ID Radio ID label If tuned to channel 0 this message will
14. Engine Coolant Hot AC Air Conditioning Off This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor will turn back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid compressor damage Engine Coolant Hot Idle Engine Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 for more information This message will appear when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down 3 60 Engine Overheated Stop Engine Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 for more information This message will appear when the engine has overheated Stop
15. If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors at Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Second Row Each outboard seating position in the rear seat has exposed metal lower anchors in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion 1 41 To assist you in locating the top tether anchors the top tether anchor symbol is located near the top tether anchors There are two top tether anchors located on the side of the wheel well in the rear cargo area There is another top tether anchor in the center of the rear cargo area Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 1 42 Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger s position or any third row position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached There is no place to attach the top tether in this position Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the fr
16. If you do not explosive gas could be present Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately 5 45 iit sD font etep The other end Gfthe negative cable fl u does not go to the dead battery It goes to a a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote N negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Your vehicle s remote negative ground location is for this purpose 6 Connect the red positive
17. Operation Tips e Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into your vehicle Use of non GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the highest setting the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced For more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 32 Rear Air Conditioning System If your vehicle has the rear air conditioning system it has two fan speed selectors One fan speed selector is located in the front overhead console and the other is located in the headliner above the second row seats The rear air conditioning system is designed to provide cooled air only There is no heating provided with this system Front Control Rear Control To operate the rear system using the front control just turn the knob to the fan position you want To use the rear control first turn the front control to the AUX position Then the rear control can be used to increase and decrease the airflow 3 31 Passenger Compartment Air Filter The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the pollen from the air entering your vehicle Like your vehicle s engine air cleaner filter it needs to be changed periodicall
18. See your GM dealer for service This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Tire Inspection and Rotation The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear Due to this your tires should not be rotated Each tire and wheel should be used only in the position it is in Check your tires and wheels regularly for unusual wear and damage Also see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 66 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 70 5 65 When It Is Time for New Tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators You need a new tire if any of the following state
19. See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you do not your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts 5 41 Battery Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco replacement battery See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for battery location Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to caus
20. To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs connect an external auxiliary device such as a camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary device power and the power on the front of the RSE player To have use of these jacks select AUX using the MODE button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control 3 99 How to Change the Video Format when in the Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC In some countries the video format may be in PAL system To change the video format perform the following 1 Connect to the red RCA jack BRIGHTNESS ETT TTT ry yy avar SELECT ENTER 6 Press the enter button to accept the change Audio Output VIDEO FORMAT PRESET NITSCEAL Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be avar SELECT ACCEPT heard through the following possible sources e Wireless Headphones 2 Press the SRCE button on the DVD faceplate or e Vehicle Speakers the remote control e Wired Headphones not included 3 Press the down arrow button to highlight the The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal VIDEO FORMAT option by infrared to the wireless headphones if there is 4 Press the enter button to select VIDEO FORMAT audio available See Headphones previously for 5 Press the right or left arrow button to select the more inronmation video format 3 100 The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the vehicle speakers by using
21. Turn the power off then on again then press the eject load button on the DVD player Do not attempt to forcibly remove the disc from the DVD player This could permanently damage the disc and the DVD player Tips and Troubleshooting Chart cont d Recommended Action Sometimes the wireless This could be caused by interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle lost the remote and or See your dealer for the headphones assistance DVD Distortion There may be an experience with audio distortion in the wireless headphones when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Positioning Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System headphone audio cuts out or buzzes Cleaning the DVD Player When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth and gently wipe the video screen Do not spray directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or too long on the video screen Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Numb
22. You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency 5 30 Notice If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine An overheat warning along with a Check Coolant Level message can indicate a serious problem If you get an engine overheat warning with no Check Coolant Level message but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you e Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving e Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow a trailer If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in NEUTRAL N while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to PARK P or NEUTRAL N and let the engine idle 2 Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting and fan speed and open the windows as necessary If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive
23. 0 ee 1 48 Security Light svdsscesievestevetn Het eherleel acess 3 46 SENICE pronn Nena dnagect saeqcuties R wei aeeht 5 3 Accessories and Modifications eee 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your VOICI sosina a eceenneen he 5 5 California Proposition 65 Warning 00 5 3 Doing Your Own Work ccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eenes 5 4 Engine Soon Light cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee een ees 3 42 Publications Ordering Information 0 7 15 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 61 Setting the TIME c eceeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeaes 3 81 Sheet Metal Damage ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 93 Shifting Into Park P ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 30 Shifting Out of Park P cssssccccsecscceseescevecesets 2 32 Signals Turn and Lane Change 00055 3 8 Spare Tire Compact assanir o A 5 86 listalling espri enian aaa aaa 5 76 11 Spare Tire cont REMOVING estida 5 74 SIONN aeeiiaii rina E Acts 5 83 Specifications Capacities ceeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 105 Speedometer cccceceeeeeceeeneee eee eeaeeaeeaeeaeeaes 3 35 Sport Mode Hight sisccsssnesiaticiete an 3 45 StabiliTrak System 00ccccccssssssssseeeeeseeeeeeees 4 11 Starting Your Engine cscceseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenes 2 24 Status of Vehicle Systems DIC 008 3 49 SIOSKING secrete irni thawed bia ana E E EPEN ENEY 4 12 Stee
24. If you accidentally select a language that you did not want ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list For more information on the other items in the SETUP menu see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 DIC Warnings and Messages These messages will appear if there is a problem detected in one of your vehicle s systems You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the screen for further use To clear a message press the CLR button Be sure to take any message that appears on the screen seriously and remember that clearing the message will only make the message disappear not the problem Battery Saver Active This message appears when the system detects that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable level The battery saver system will start reducing certain features of the vehicle which you may not be able to notice At the point that the features are disabled this message is displayed It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until BATTERY VOLTS appears Battery Voltage High This message indicates that the electrical charging system is overcharging the battery When the system detects that the battery voltage is above approximately 16 volts this message will be
25. Press the switch to the second stop to express open the sunroof to a preset comfort position Press the second stop again to fully express open the sunroof Press the front of the switch to close the sunroof The first stop will close the sunroof at a desired position at normal speed and the second stop will express close the roof Press the back of the sunshade switch to open the sunshade Press the front of the switch to the first stop to close the sunshade to a desired position at a normal speed Press the switch forward to the second stop to express close the sunshade Anti Pinch Feature If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction The sunroof will then reverse To close the sunroof once it has re opened remove the obstruction and press the front of the sunroof switch Resynchronization To resynchronize the sunroof and sunshade do the following 1 With the engine running press and hold both the sunroof switch in the open position and the sunshade switch in the closed position for six seconds 2 Release both buttons 3 When the sunroof reaches the fully closed position the sunshade will close 4 After the sunroof and sunshade have fully closed continue to hold the sunroof switch in the closed position for an additional three or four seconds to complete the Teach Process 2 49
26. See AVC Automatic Volume Compensation under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information H A Home Away Preset Stations This menu item allows you to switch back and forth between your home and away preset radio stations Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch between home and away See Setting Preset Stations under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information AUTOSTORE PRESETS This menu item allows you to automatically store radio stations with the strongest signals as presets See Setting Preset Stations under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information CAT Category This menu item allows you to select radio stations based on preset categories To turn the CAT feature on press the TUNE SEL knob once When CAT is on an X will be in the box next to CAT on the menu The X disappears when CAT is off See Activating Category CAT Stations RDS and XM under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information TA Traffic Announcement This menu item allows you to turn the TA feature on and off To turn the TA feature on press the TUNE SEL knob once When TA is on an X will be in the box next to TA on the menu The X disappears when TA is off See RDS Messages under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information MSG Message RECALL RDS Radio Data System MESSAGE This menu item allows you to view an RDS radio station message broadcast by a radio station To view the message pr
27. See footnote k Check tires for inflation pressures and wear See Tires on page 5 53 a ee Inspect brake system See footnote a a ae Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section inspect suspension and stearina components See oroe iT inspect engine colng system Seeron O T oo inspect wperbades Seeon O Too inspect estat system components See ooro l T Twricatebody components Seeon O T Check ransmission fuia ievel andada twi asreesa J o Replace passenger conpariment ar titer Ses Tooms g Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 41500 83 000 125 000 166000 207500 240 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter Severe service See footnote h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service For vehicles used for trailer towing Chan
28. This message is displayed when a non emissions related powertrain malfunction occurs Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible Speed Limited to 80 mph 129 km h This message indicates that your vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph 129 km h because the vehicle detects a problem in the suspension system Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer Stability System Engaged This message will be displayed any time StabiliTrak is actively assisting you with directional control of the vehicle Slippery road conditions may exist when this message is displayed so adjust your driving accordingly This message may stay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 for more information 3 64 Stability System Off This message will be displayed any time you turn off StabiliTrak using the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 for more information When this message has been displayed StabiliTrak is no longer available to assist you with directional control of the vehicle Adjust your driving accordingly Stability System Ready This message will be displayed any time you turn StabiliTrak on again using the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 for more information When this message has been displayed StabiliTrak is
29. adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night 4 35 When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you are not fresh such as after a day s work do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it is ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships al
30. away from the arm j Rear Wiper Blade Replacement Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield To replace the rear wiper blade follow the steps when no wiper blade is installed could damage listed previously the windshield Any damage that occurs would not be covered by your warranty Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield 6 Replace the blade with a new one 5 52 Tires CAUTION Continued Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your GM Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer s booklet included with your vehicle s Owner s Manual Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be A CAUTION cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving e Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous
31. or the airbag covering on the driver s and right front passenger s seatback or the side impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side windows the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel both the airbag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag the airbag module and seatback for the driver s and right front passenger s seat mounted side impact airbags or side impact airbag module and ceiling covering for the roof mounted side impact airbag Do not open or break the airbag coverings Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If you have had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety be
32. the inability to see in dim light and are not even aware of it 4 31 os in Rain and on Wet Roads LN m is Jy AA Hii y l 7 Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you cannot stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction is not as good as on dry roads And if your tires do not have much tread left you will get even less traction It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement 4 32 The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause accidents They will not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Driving too
33. your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on your leather Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions 5 89 Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so that the speaker will not be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety
34. 76 If this feature is selected Doors Unlock in Park Driver Unlock in Park or Driver Unlock Key Out cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Delayed Locking This feature delays the locking of the vehicle s doors for up to five seconds after a power door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed The five second delay occurs after the last door is closed Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until DELAYED LOCKING is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Lock Passenger Window This feature allows you to disable either all the passenger
35. CAM z g C4 COMP OLE i z E u SIA A g Uy ILD SAE NSW ARWR WSO We HEA C43 TEP PK AON ONG HIFAN WFAN LOWSPEED AOCESSORY if jt Wi NERO HISPEED SP FAN FAN RELAY REAY En renal MINI MIN MICRO OPT 8 SE U R ee REFE ODDCOLS SPEO POSO SENOS REN aoc GEG TOWS SWE DADL a TSE VEOH C4 Co AHO SROS aC UC OER E COWES STENY Cy C4 The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 LO SPEED for more information on location BELAS WINI Low Speed Fan Motor Be De z 3E ID RELA HI SPEED FAN RELAY MiNI High Speed Fan Motor ELAY MIN Bee Man Series Parallel Fan 5 97 Relays Usage RELAY MICRO co RELAY MICRO DRL RELAY MICRO OPT LO BEAM Low Beam HID Headlamps Option RELAY HID MINI OPT HDLP WASH RELAY MINI OPT SPARE Not Used BLOWER RELAY MIN Front Blower FOG LAMP RELAY MICRO Fo9 Lamps MAIN RELAY Powertrain Engine Control MICRO Module ECM ela Starter Solenoid Headlamp Washer Motor Option RELAY MINI 5 98 Relays Usage MP CL Ben Nee Compressor Clutch eno Ignition Switch ON Wiring Harnesses BODY W H Wiring Harness Connection I P W H Wiring Harness Connection ENG W H Engine Wiring Harness Connection LAMP Connection yCases Usage Pona DER
36. E e oon erbat Bow Side Rear Power Dieatibetior Bon Side Rear Power HI FAN High Cooling Fan Motor BLOWER PWM Fan Motor Assembly ne peel STON PRON Parking STARTER __ Starter Solenoid LIC DIMMING Rear License Plate Assembly EBCM Electronic Brake Control Module DIM Dash Integration Module DIM ALDL Assembly Line LOW FAN Low Cooling Fan Motor Drivers Side Taillamp Assembly LT PARK i Fuses Usage ata Lin Passenger s Side Taillamp FLASHER Turn Signal Hazard Flasher Module Front Parking Lamp Assembly V8 ECM V8 ECM Canister Purge HORN Dual Horn Assembly STRG CTLS Hee ie Pad LT HI BEAM Driver s Side High Beam Headlamp STARTER RLY Jumper to Starter Relay LT LOW BEAM Driver s Side Low Beam Headlamp Driver s and Passenger s Side Passenger s Side Low Beam WASH NOZ Heated Washer Nozzles RT LOW BEAM Headlam P ODD COILS Odd Ignition Coils Fuel Injectors RT HI BEAM Passenger s Side High Beam Odd Injection Coils Headlamp TCM ECM and IPC Instrument High Feature V6 ECM Electronic TEMIFE Panel Cluster Control Module SPARE Not Used REAR WPR Rear Wiper Motor Anti lock Brake System ECM TCM Transmission Control F F THEFT Module PASS Key Ill Module VICS Cate ee 5 99 HFV6 ECM SPARE Not Used EVEN COILS Even Injection Coils SPARE Not Used Instrument Panel Accessory Penne Power Outlet Ignition Switch Power to IGN 3 IGN SW and CRANK CCP Climate Control VOLT CHECK Driver s and Pas
37. Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 3 44 Parade DIMMING es oie cidvores essenin e eee 3 20 Tire Pressure Light cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 41 Reading Lamps pers erresrererererenenennerenen 3 20 Malfunction Indicator Lamp c0 ccccceceeeeeees 3 42 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 3 20 Oil Pressure Light s s s 3 45 Accessory Power Outlet S eteeeeees 3 23 Sport Mode Light 0 cccccccesesseeseeeeeeeeees 3 45 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 3 24 Security Light 0 ccccccceseesseeeesseeseeeseeseenes 3 46 Section 3 Fog Lamp LIQht cnginccenesaceadeetaeastamensacndaninde 3 46 Lights On Reminder eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 46 Cruise Control Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 46 Highbeam On Light eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 47 Fuel Gage E E E oateeee deers 3 47 Driver Information Center DIC 3 48 System Controls sirenerne ania 3 48 Status of Vehicle Systems c eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 49 DIC Main Menu seo ssenienasiesno iensen 3 53 DIC Warnings and Messages 6eeeeeeeeees 3 57 DIC Vehicle Personalization c eeeeeeeeees 3 66 Instrument Panel Audio System s cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeen ees 3 80 Setting the Time assier sanoisi iina 3 81 Radio with CD c cccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 82 Navigation Radio System ceeeeeeeee
38. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed below A CAUTION Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from the spare To release the spare tire from the secondary latch do the following 1 If the cable is not visible start this procedure at Step 3 2 If the cable is visible turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 5 81 3 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack and raise the jack at least 10 turns 4 Place the jack under the vehicle ahead of the rear bumper Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire 8 Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pull it out from under the vehicle 9 Reach under the vehicle and remove the wheel wrench and jack 10 Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel 5 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack opening when the spare tire has been completely until it lifts the secondary latch spring lowered 6 Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops 11 Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back moving upward and is held firmly in place this lets up if the cable is
39. GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your GM dealer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs 7 12 If an Accident Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident Try to relax and t
40. Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the drivers door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds 4 45 The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 53 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight
41. Lamps sesesssscssscsrreeneennn 3 17 Flash tO PaSS ereere a nn a e eai 3 9 Halogen Bulbs perriso nresnain 5 51 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 50 High Low Beam Changer 0seeeeeeeneeeeeees 3 8 OM Reminder cetsscctewlecdantencatanctddacheniaetageinias 3 17 Headlamps cont WVASIIOR esee cede cas T E 3 12 Wiper Activated sipiin t 3 16 Heated Seats cceccceseeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 OALON tiicacctepetded hbehemoubposadaate nel E E EER 3 25 Highbeam Om Light ise cce teeoccseciscniesd idee 3 47 Highway HYPNOSIS ccccccice cd eicecsecsriessnbeetvetaraies 4 37 Hill and Mountain Roads iiris reinn 4 37 Hood Checking Things Under eeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 Release ersen oaa P A E EENE 5 11 POM eiae e E E r S 3 6 How to Use This Manual ceceeeeeeeeeenee eee ees ii How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 16 ignition POSIIONS soreer taaan nenea 2 22 ITMUMODINZEN sarea E 2 19 Immobilizer Operation cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee teers 2 20 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 31 Inflation Tire Pressure eeceeeee eee eeeeeees 5 60 Instrument Panel OVErVICW ec ee cec ec ordan oe Ea asi 3 4 Instrument Panel I P Brightn SS s cisdcce ance egis A E 3 19 GIUSTE sa csasctaguatarsnttadssansaedtecnnatsenswenesdseaders 3 34 JUMP Starting va icveseiiiiiidinvihaddiaeeiee les eeeesiael 5 42 Keyless Entry System
42. Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 36 Dinghy Towing Notice If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground the drivetrain components could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground If your vehicle must be towed see Dolly Towing following for more information Dolly Towing Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground If your vehicle is a rear wheel drive it can be towed using a dolly If you have an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle it can only be towed on a flat bed trailer To tow your vehicle using a dolly follow these steps 1 Put the rear wheels on the dolly 2 Put the vehicle in PARK P 3 Set the parking brake and then remove the key 4 Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing 5 Release the parking brake Level Control This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the load changes It s automatic you don t need to adjust anything 4 51 Towing a Trailer A CAUTION If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when
43. Lights ssrsrrniisienisssuiepin niens 3 36 Safety Belts Care Of aropin e En RAE RE 5 90 Driver POSIIOM sc cceisieccucenarccteenteemanneaine aancwecen 1 16 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 16 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 15 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 1 26 Rear Seat Passengers ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 1 23 Right Front Passenger Position 004 1 23 Safety Belt Extender c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 28 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 22 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 1 11 Safety Warnings and Symbols eeeeeeeeeeeees iii Scheduled Maintenance n a eenn 6 4 Seats Head Restraints cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 Heated Seats visisahiitencideeeiliiiiieigielenees 1 4 Manual Passenger ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 1 2 Memory cisctictdatcelisceyctnctccamenniuaemoaheieestandeenes 2 52 Power LUMDAMr tac cicccacceietancha nce teeta hacadecieatesicns 1 3 Power Seat cccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Rear Seat Operation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 9 Seats cont Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeeeneeeeeneee tenes 1 5 Stowable Seal s ccs0 e areenan e iA 1 9 Secondary Latch System ceeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 5 81 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 1 45 Right Front Seat Position
44. The format and content of this function will vary for each disc gt Next Press this button to go to the next chapter or track of a DVD or CD ka Previous Press this button to go to the previous chapter or track of a DVD or CD D gt Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward through the chapter or track of a DVD or CD This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews lt Rewind Press this button to rewind through the chapter or track of a DVD or CD This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews E Stop Press this button to stop the play of a DVD or CD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to turn the DVD player on to start play of a DVD or CD and to switch between play and pause of a DVD or CD 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter title and track number selection 10 Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter title and track numbers greater than 9 Press this button before inputting the number amp Clear Press this button within three seconds after inputting a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs 3 107 Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart To change the batteries do the following Recommended Action 1 Remove the battery compartmen
45. The navigation system has built in features intended to minimize driver distraction Technology alone no matter how advanced can never replace your own judgment See the navigation system manual for some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving 3 98 Rear Seat Entertainment System Your vehicle may have the DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system includes a DVD player a video display screen two sets of wireless headphones and a remote control RSE is available in a base and an uplevel version The uplevel version is provided with the navigation radio if equipped The uplevel RSE system offers the rear seat passengers to have shared control of FM1 FM2 AM weather CDC and XM Satellite Radio Service if equipped Before You Drive The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so Headphones The RSE system includes two sets of wireless headphones Each set of headphones has an ON OFF control An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when they are on If the light does not illuminate the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information To turn the headphones OFF activate the ON OFF control Each set of headphones has a volume knob To adjust the volume adjust this knob The transmitters are located above the video display scr
46. Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal This is normal Continue to steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak a Service Stability System message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 When this message is displayed the system is not operational Driving should be adjusted accordingly StabiliTrak comes on automatically whenever you start your vehicle To help assist you with directional control of the vehicle you should always leave the system on You can turn StabiliTrak off if you ever need to through the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 If your vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak activates the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may reengage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 3 12 for more information Panic Brake Assist Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that monitors the intention of the driver while braking If the system senses that the driver has applied hard fast pressure to the brake pedal the system will generate additional pressure making it easier for the driver to maintain brake application When this happens the brake pedal will feel easier to push Just hold the brake pedal do
47. While driving in sport mode the transmission may remain in a gear longer than it would in normal driving mode based on braking throttle input and vehicle lateral acceleration 2 Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward to downshift The odometer on the instrument panel cluster will change from the mileage to a number indicating the requested gear range when moving the shift lever forward or rearward See Speedometer and Odometer on page 3 35 for more information on the odometer While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer shifting and increased performance You can use this for sport driving or when climbing descending hills to stay in gear longer or to down shift for more power or engine braking The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine Revolutions Per Minute RPM The transmission will not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the engine rpm is too high If shifting is prevented for any reason the currently selected gear will flash multiple times indicating that the transmission has not shifted gears The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear selected and will automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to a stop This will allow for more power during take off and passing When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions you may want to shift into second gear A higher gear allows you to
48. a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 90 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish GM approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 94 Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle The vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible Windshield and Wiper Bl
49. as soon as possible See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 for more information Service Steering System Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering system See Steering on page 4 12 This message will be displayed if a problem is detected with the speed variable assist steering system When this message is displayed you may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier but you will still be able to steer the vehicle Service Suspension System This message is displayed to indicate that the suspension system is not operating properly Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer Service Theft System This message means there is a problem with the immobilizer See mmobilizer on page 2 19 for more information A fault has been detected in the system which means that the system is disabled and is not protecting the vehicle The vehicle usually restarts however you may want to take your vehicle to your GM dealer before turning off the engine Service Tire Monitor System This message will appear if the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system is not working properly Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer as soon as possible See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 62 for more information 3 63 Service Transmission This message will display if there is a problem with the transmission of your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Service Vehicle Soon
50. be turned on when the ignition is in ON ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that the vehicle was sold in The DVD region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD player will also play audio CDs Not all home recorded CDs CD R or CD RW formats will play in this DVD player If an error message appears on the video screen see DVD Messages later in this section 3 101 TAmnmmDA K ton ONE e N NCC O n00 Oon KANO Panasonic m DVD Player Buttons D Power Press this button to turn the RSE system on and off A Eject Press this button to eject a DVD or CD SRCE Source Press this button to cycle through the available video modes Auxiliary is available when an auxiliary device is plugged into the auxiliary jacks on the DVD faceplate If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system each press of the SRCE button will cycle the rear video between DVD AUX TV and front DVD 3 102 Pressing the enter button when this menu appears on the display will switch the RSE setting between all speaker and rear video All speaker will not be available if the front passenger has turned on the parental control All Speaker The radio and the RSE unit will share control of what is heard through the vehicle speakers All au
51. belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 5 90 Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Washing Your Vehicle The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely GM approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 94 Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water
52. can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving on page 4 3 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how well built the vehicle A CAUTION Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill 4 21 Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the
53. can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss If a leak occurs take your vehicle to the dealership service department and have it repaired as soon as possible Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 25 How to Reset the Change Transmission Fluid Message and the Transmission Fluid Indicator After the transmission fluid has been changed the Change Trans Fluid message and the transmission fluid life indicator must be reset To res
54. can get sliding crossrails through your dealer to use for tying things down These let you load some things on top of your vehicle as long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 100 Ibs 45 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely 2 47 Convenience Net If your vehicle has a convenience net the convenience net attaches to the floor or back wall of the rear of the vehicle using six anchor points The net can be used like a hammock across the rear of the vehicle or hooked on the floor Put small loads like grocery bags behind the net It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops The net is not for larger heavier loads Store them in the rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can Cargo Cover If your vehicle has a cargo cover you can use it to cover items in the rear of the vehicle Pull the cover from the passenger s side to the driver s side and slide the ends into the slots to secure it When it is not in use take the ends out of the slots and allow the cover to roll back up Cargo Management System Your vehicle may have a cargo management system It provides extra storage space for the rear of the vehicle 2 48 The
55. cargo management system has three compartments The one closest to the front of the vehicle opens from behind the second row The center compartment has a divider The compartment closest to the rear of the vehicle has a removable storage bin Sunroof Sunroof UltraView A CAUTION People who are in a crash and not wearing a safety belt properly can suffer much worse injuries They can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it and be seriously injured or killed This is true for any vehicle occupant in any motor vehicle but if you have the Ultraview roof it is if anything even more important Ina rollover or other crash the Ultraview roof can be damaged or destroyed People who are unbelted would then be at even greater risk of being ejected from the vehicle Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too The vehicle may have an UltraView sunroof over the first two rows of seats The ignition must be on or in accessory or the Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active for to operate it See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 23 The sunroof sunshade switches are located in the headliner between the driver and front passenger One switch operates the sunroof and the other switch operates the sunshade Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the sunroof When the switch is pressed to the first stop the sunroof will open to a desired position
56. center Move the release lever to the side and raise the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle on the lower left side of the instrument panel Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then pull the hood down and close it firmly Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 3 6L V6 engine you will see the following Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 97 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 38 Battery See Battery on page 5 42 Passenger Compartment Air Filter See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 32 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 37 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 16 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 16 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 39 Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 29 and Cooling System on page 5 32 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24 When you open the hood on the 4 6L V8 engine you will see the following Underhood Fuse Block See Und
57. closed position for the entire open close cycle of the shade 3 At the same time press and hold the front sunroof switch in the open position and the front sunshade switch in the closed position for about six seconds When the front sunroof reaches the fully closed position the front sunshade will close 4 After the sunroof and sunshade have fully closed continue to hold the sunroof switch in the closed position for an additional three or four seconds to complete the Teach Process 2 51 Vehicle Personalization In addition to the following features your vehicle may also have features that can be programmed through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 for more information Memory Seat and Mirrors If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program and recall memory settings for the driver s seating and outside rearview mirror driving positions for up to two drivers If your vehicle has the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature you can also program and recall memory settings for the throttle and brake pedal driving positions 2 52 The buttons for this feature are located on the drivers door armrest Use the following steps to program the buttons 1 Adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner both outside mirrors and the throttle and brake pedals 2 Press and hold button 1 for at least three seconds Two beeps will sound to confirm that the
58. collision if you drive after drinking Please do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking Ride home ina cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you are driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 38 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be
59. dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Service on page 7 6 If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following 4 50 Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing e What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations e How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow e Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations e ls your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before
60. different shade than it was originally This is normal Halogen Bulbs A CAUTION Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information It s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn For proper windshield wiper blade length and type see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 To replace the wiper blade assembly do the following 1 Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off 2 Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them off again when the wipers are in the out wipe position The driver s side blade will be straight up and down on the windshield 3 Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the windshield 5 51 SSS a 4 Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a 7 Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over T shaped position You should be able to see a tab the wiper arm to engage the J hooked end Pull up 5 Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper blade on the assembly to lock it into place assembly down far enough to release it from the 8 Repeat the steps for the other wiper J hooked end of the wiper arm Slide the assembl
61. e Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently e If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain 4 37 If you drive regularly in steep country or if you are planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving on page 4 17 for information about driving off road e Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads e Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill A CAUTION If you do not shift down your brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope 4 38 A CAUTION Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they would not work
62. either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Lights Flash at Unlock This feature flashes the exterior lamps when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle The lamps will flash for approximately 20 seconds unless a door is opened the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY ON or START or the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 3 71 Lights Flash at Lock This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle All doors must be closed for th
63. hanging you know that the secondary latch has released Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can 7 Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench You will not be able to store a spare tire using the counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced the spare tire is resting on the wheel wrench 5 82 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools A CAUTION Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Storing the Flat Tire with Third Row Passengers 1 Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on 2 Use the power third row seat button near the liftgate to tilt the third row seatback forward slightly 3 Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the tire in an upright position against the third row seat 4 Route the tie down strap through the tire as shown in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo tie downs in the rear of the vehicle Tighten the tie down strap 5 83 Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat Load Floor 1 Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on 2 Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the tire in a horiz
64. hill A Yes These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident e When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that is not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you do not drive straight down e Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N This is called free wheeling The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade 4 25 Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider e Ahill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover e Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways
65. is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If the mirror is not adjusted for compass variance the compass could give false readings The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is driven outside zone eight Under certain circumstances such as a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust the compass variance To adjust for compass variance do the following 3 Once the zone number appears on the display 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the zone map that follows press the on off button quickly until you reach the correct zone number If C appears in the compass window the compass may need calibration See Compass Calibration listed previously Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing 2 Press and hold the on off button until a zone number appears on the display 2 37 Outside Power Heated Mirrors The controls on the driver s door armrest operate both outside rearview mirrors Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector control to choose the driver s side or passenger s side mirror The center position is off and will not
66. it will not re appear 3 51 TRANS FLUID LIFE If you select this item the percentage of remaining transmission fluid life is displayed If you see 99 TRANS FLUID LIFE on the display that means that 99 of the current transmission fluid life remains When the transmission fluid life is depleted the Change Trans Fluid message will appear on the display You should change the transmission fluid as soon as possible Be sure to keep a written record of the mileage and date of the fluid change so you will have it for future reference See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message by clearing it from the display you still must reset the transmission fluid life monitor separately For more information on resetting the transmission fluid life monitor see Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 25 LF TIRE If you select this item the driver s side front tire pressure will be displayed If the tire pressure is low LOW will be displayed with this item The pressure can be displayed in pounds per square inch PSI or kilopascals KPA To change the units see DIC Main Menu on page 3 53 3 52 RF TIRE If you select this item the passenger s side front tire pressure will be displayed If the tire pressure is low LOW will be displayed with this item The pressure can be displayed in pounds per square inch PSI or kilop
67. manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your GM dealer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the owner the surfac
68. modern motor vehicles has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle s performance Your vehicle uses on board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel economy to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and if so equipped to provide anti lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations Some information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions other information is stored only in a crash event by computer systems such as those commonly called event data recorders EDR In a crash event computer systems such as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated such as data related to engine speed brake application throttle position vehicle speed safety belt usage airbag readiness airbag performance and the severity of a collision If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak steering performance including yaw rate steering wheel angle and lateral acceleration is also recorded This information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes these on board systems do not record sounds such as conversation of vehicle occup
69. move the mirrors if the directional control pad is touched 2 38 Once the mirror to be adjusted is selected use the arrows on the directional control pad to move the mirror Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of the vehicle and the area behind it The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash or a confined space To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle To return the mirror to its original position push outward Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position before driving The preferred position can be stored in memory if the vehicle has the memory option See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 2 52 for more information When the rear window defogger is turned on both outside rearview mirrors are heated to help clear them of ice snow and condensation See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Climate Control System on page 3 25 for more information Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror The drivers outside mirror may have an automatic dimming feature that helps to reduce glare from other vehicles headlamps This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview mirror See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar on page 2 35 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror If the vehicle has memory seat and mirrors it will also be capable of adjusting the passenger s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when th
70. not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power outlets Notice Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only 3 23 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter Notice f you put papers pins or other flammable items in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray Ashtray The ashtray is located under the climate control panel on the instrument panel Press on the door to release the ashtray To empty the ashtray remove it from the instrument panel by gripping the edges and
71. not to recall until the key is placed in the ignition To change feature preferences see Entering the Personalization Menu following 3 66 Entering the Personalization Menu To enter the feature programming mode use the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition to ON but do not start the engine Make sure the vehicle is in PARK P 2 If your vehicle has memory settings press the appropriate memory button 1 or 2 located on the driver s door armrest The DIC display will show either Driver 1 or 2 depending on which button was selected 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob once to access the main menu of the DIC 4 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until SETUP is highlighted 5 Press the TUNE SEL knob once to access the SETUP menu 6 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until the feature you want to change is highlighted then press the TUNE SEL knob to turn the feature on or off If the feature is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If none of the personalization items are turned on turn on the personalization menu by pressing the TUNE SEL knob The list of features will then appear and you can repeat Step 6 Personalization Features The following choices are available for programming Personalization Name This feature allows you to type in a name that will appear on the DIC display whenever the corresponding remote keyless entry transmitter is used or one of the buttons on the driver s door armrest 1 o
72. of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 46 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle If your vehicle can tow a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips Example 1 Example 2 Item Description Total Item Description Tota Vehicle Capacity Vehicle Capacity A Weight for Example 1 1 000 Ibs 453 ko a Weight for Example 2 1 200 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Subtract Occupant Weight 300 Ibs 136 kg Occupant Weight 750 Ibs 340 kg 150 Ibs 68 kg x 2 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 Available Occupant and Available oe Cargo Weight 700 Ibs 317 kg za Cargo Weigh
73. of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs later in this section If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a soft marker instead Notice f you add any label to a CD insert more than one CD into the slot at a time or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs you could damage the CD player When using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on the display above the firm keys in place of the preset stations if programmed LOAD Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player will hold up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can
74. on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path or killed Always get out on the uphill high the vehicle will take if it does roll over side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path 4 27 Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand the wheels will not get good traction You cannot accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you will need longer braking distances It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get stuck When you drive on sand you will sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes the tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers 4 28 Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor s
75. or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of your leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean
76. order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil V6 Engine CS V8 Engine If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick you will need to add at least one quart liter of oil But you must use the right kind This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 105 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged as FA pease Meili SAE 5W 30 AR V6 Engine V8 Engine See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things For
77. parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking on page 4 6 It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire c
78. pressure cap 5 34 A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and slowly counterclockwise left about one quarter turn remove it and then stop If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 5 35 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engi
79. pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the
80. pry open the transmitter Once the transmitter is separated use a pencil or similar object to remove the old battery Do not use a metal object Insert the new battery as the instructions under the cover indicate Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure no moisture can enter Press any button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to resynchronize the transmitter Check the operation of the transmitter Doors and Locks A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle Because your vehicle has the theft deterrent system you must unlock the doors from the outside with the key or remote keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm If
81. pulling straight out To reinstall push the tray back into place There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors 3 24 Cigarette Lighter Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the rear seat passengers To activate the cigarette lighter push it into the heating element and let go When the lighter is ready it will pop back out by itself Climate Controls Dual Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation for your vehicle Oraa Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When this button is pressed and the temperature is set the system will automatically control the inside temperature the air delivery mode the air conditioning compressor and the fan speed AUTO will appear on the display 1 Press the AUTO button 2 Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting between 70 F 21 C and 80 F 27 C Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster If you set the system at the warmest temperature setting the system will remain in manual mode at t
82. s side impact airbag is in the side of the driver s seatback closest to the door The right front passenger s side impact airbag is in the The roof mounted side impact airbag for the driver side of the passenger s seatback closest to the door and the passenger directly behind the driver is in the ceiling above the side windows The roof mounted side impact airbag for the front passenger and the passenger directly behind the front passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows 1 56 A CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating airbag will be blocked Do not let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact airbag The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear When Should an Airbag Inflate The driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment thr
83. seat and mirror positions have been saved 3 Repeat the procedure for a second driver using button 2 The vehicle must be in PARK P to recall the stored driving positions Press one of the numbered memory buttons to recall the stored setting Each time a memory button is pressed a single beep will sound Three chimes will sound and the setting will not be recalled if you press button 1 or 2 when the vehicle is not in PARK P If you would like the stored driving positions to be recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter or when you place the key in the ignition see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any time press one of the power seat or mirror controls Two personalized exit positions can also be programmed Use the following steps to program exit positions 1 Press memory seat button 1 or the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the number 1 on the back to recall the driving position 2 Adjust the driver s seat to the desired exit position 3 Press and hold the exit button located above buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door armrest for at least three seconds Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exit position has been saved 4 Repeat the procedure for a second driver using memory seat button 2 or the remote keyless entry transmitter with the number 2 on the back To re
84. slower for about 10 minutes If the warning does not come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues and you have not stopped pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there is still no sign of steam you can idle the engine for three minutes while you are parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Should an overheated engine condition exist an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance A low coolant and or engine overheat warning will indicate that an overheat condition exists Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil See Engine Oil on page 5 16 5 31 Cooling System Some vehicles may be equipped with an engine driven fan as well as the electric pusher fans A which are When you decide it is saf
85. stay there If you hold the switch at resume accelerate the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at resume accelerate Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the set button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed e Move the cruise switch from on to resume accelerate Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to resume accelerate Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at end of the lever to increase cruise set speed your new set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than current speed for this method to work If it is not 5 mph higher switch cruise switch off then on and then reset your speed using the set button Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control e Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it e To slow down in very small amounts briefly press the set button Each time you do this you ll go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slo
86. still cannot shift out of PARK P try the following 1 Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY Open and close the driver s door to turn off the RAP feature 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift to NEUTRAL N 4 Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want 5 Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can 2 32 Shift Lock Release If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low voltage you can still shift the vehicle into PARK P and remove the ignition key Use the following procedure to release the shift lever 1 Use a tool to remove the cap with the lock symbol located next to the shift lever 2 Using a narrow pointed tool press down on the mechanism under the cap so that you can move the shift lever Parking Over Things That Burn A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust A CAUTION Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs were not done correctly Your vehic
87. the Change Engine Oil message comes back on when you start your vehicle or the percentage does not return to 100 the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure Navigation System If you have the navigation system see Vehicle Customization in the SRX Navigation System Owner Supplement for how to reset the oil life indicator What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help 5 23 Engine Air Cleaner Filter F 4 6L V8 shown 3 6L V6 similar The engine air cleaner filter is in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle near the front See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for
88. the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle e The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can e Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain does not toss things around A CAUTION e Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You will find other important information in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 Luggage Carrier on page 2 47 and Tires on page 5 53 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off road
89. the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 34 A CAUTION Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints A CAUTION The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the
90. the radio The RSE system may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the RSE system power is on Once the RSE system is selected as an audio source on the radio adjust the speaker volume on the radio if necessary If the RSE system power is not on the RSE system will not be an available source on the radio Refer to the radio information for the radio that your vehicle has for more information Video Screen The video screen is located in the floor console Lift up the screen by the top or the sides into the full open position Adjust the screen s position as desired When the video screen is not in use close the screen The DVD player and display will continue to operate when the screen is in the up or the down position The video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless headphones and the remote control If the screen is in the closed position the signals will not be available for the operation of the headphones and the remote control Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information DVD Player The DVD player is located in the floor console under the display Flip up the display to access the DVD player The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control See Remote Control later in this section for more information The DVD player power may
91. the remote keyless entry transmitter See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 for more information on programming this feature Lock Press this symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors This also arms the theft deterrent system If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation the doors must be closed for this feature to work If a door is open remote confirmation will be canceled w Unlock Press this symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the driver s door This also disarms the theft deterrent system Press the button again to unlock the rest of the doors You can program your vehicle so that the exterior lamps will flash when you unlock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 for more information on programming this feature If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation the doors must be closed for this feature to work If a door is open remote confirmation will be canceled x Panic Alarm The remote keyless entry transmitter comes equipped with an instant panic alarm Press the horn symbol when the ignition is turned off The horn will sound and the exterior lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds To stop the instant panic alarm press the symbol again or turn the ignition to ON QD Power Liftgate Press and hold this button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to open and close the li
92. the shift lever is moved out of REVERSE R See Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 2 39 for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory 3 78 To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until MIRROR TO CURB IN REV is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Enhanced Chime Volume This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the vehicle s warning chimes The chime volume cannot be turned off only adjusted Programmable Modes Mode 1 NORMAL Mode 2 LOUD Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu foll
93. the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly 4 57 Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns 4 58 Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the botto
94. the vehicle and turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 A chime will also sound when this message is displayed Engine Power Reduced This message informs you that the vehicle is reducing engine power because the transmission is being placed in gear under conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle s engine or transmission This also can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate Fuel Level Low When this message appears on the display it means that your vehicle is low on fuel You should refill the fuel tank as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this message is displayed Headlamps Suggested This message will appear when the amount of available light outside the vehicle is low and the exterior lamp control is off This message informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even though the daytime running lamps DRL are still illuminated and it has become dark enough outside to require the headlamps and or other exterior lamps This message will also appear when the windshield wipers have been on for more than six seconds and the exterior lamp control is off or in the parking lamp position Ice Possible This message appears when the outside temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions Left Rear Door Ajar When this message appears on the display it means that the driver s side rear door was not closed com
95. the windows are down and the doors are locked don t reach in to manually unlock the vehicle because you will set off the alarm From the inside use the manual lock levers located on the door panels near the windows Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door To unlock the door pull up on the lever Central Door Unlocking System Your vehicle has a central door unlocking feature When unlocking the driver s door you can unlock the other doors by holding the key in the turned position for a few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice in the lock cylinder Power Door Locks T The power door lock switches are located on the front doors Press the bottom part of the power door lock switch to lock or the top of the switch to unlock all the doors at once The rear doors do not have power door lock switches You must use the manual levers to lock and unlock the rear doors when riding in the rear seat Delayed Locking With this feature you can delay the actual locking of the doors When the power door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed when the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened a chime will sound three times indicating that delayed locking is active When all the doors are closed the doors will lock automatically after five seconds If a door is reopened before five seconds have elapsed the five second timer will reset itself
96. the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow the wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power seats When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away 5 96 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If a fuse blows see your dealer for service immediately If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can The fuses are located in three fuse blocks one located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side and the other two under the rear seat Underhood Fuse Block To access the fuses push in the two tabs located on each side of the fuse block cover Then lift the cover off C PARE SPARE SPARE
97. tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H V W and ZR speed rated tires If you choose snow tires with a lower speed rating never exceed the tire s maximum speed capability A CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes other than those originally installed on your vehicle brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes other than those originally installed on your vehicle brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on all wheels It is all right to drive with your vehicle s compact spare temporarily it was developed for use on your vehicle See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 86 A CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pres
98. to an inflating airbag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag inflation before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door A CAUTION Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 31 1 52 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 37 for more information Where Are the Airbags The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 53 The front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 54 The driver
99. transmitted Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons To erase programming from the three Universal Home Remote buttons do the following 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer than 30 seconds 2 Release both buttons The Universal Home Remote is now in the train learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote shown earlier in this section Individual buttons cannot be erased but they can be reprogrammed See Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button following this section Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To program a device to Universal Home Remote using a Universal Home Remote button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired Universal Home Remote button Do not release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds While still holding the Universal Home Remote button proceed with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote shown earlier in this section For additional information on Universal Home Remote see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 4 2 45 Storage Areas Glove Box To open the glove box lift up on the lever Use your door key to lock or unlock it Cupholder s Your vehicle has cupholders located between the fr
100. warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 48 for more information 3 33 Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going how much fuel you re using and many of the other things you ll need to know to drive safely and economically United States version shown Canada si
101. window switches or the rear passenger window switches only If this feature is turned on all passenger window switches will be disabled when the window lockout button is pressed If the feature is off only the rear passenger window switches will be disabled See Power Windows on page 2 15 for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until LOCK PASS WINDOW is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 3 77 Mirror to Curb in Reverse If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on the passenger s outside rearview mirror will move downward so you can view the curb when the shift lever is shifted into REVERSE R The mirror will return to the last known driving position when
102. works all of the lock cylinders on the vehicle Your vehicle has an Immobilizer Vehicle Theft Deterrent System The key has a transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in the vehicle s steering column If a replacement key or any additional key is needed you must purchase it from your dealer The key will have PK3 stamped on it Keep the bar code tag that came with the original keys Give this tag to your dealer if you need a new key made Notice If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys In an emergency contact Cadillac Roadside Service See Roadside Service on page 7 6 If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle OnStar may be able to send a command to unlock your vehicle See OnStar System on page 2 40 for more information Remote Keyless Entry System Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the fol
103. year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you are driving do not wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to re adjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who does not lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as the headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness
104. you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured You may also damage your vehicle the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle 4 52 Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transmission rear axle wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat What s more the trailer adds
105. your vehicle Substitute Engine Oil When adding oil to maintain engine oil level oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M may not be available You can add substitute oil designated SAE 5W 30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should not be used for an oil change Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all you will need for good performance and engine protection 5 21 Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A Change Engine Oil message in the DIC will come on Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be r
106. 1 29 Q A What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window move the child toward the center of the vehicle Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on page 1 26 lf the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position move the child toward the safety belt buckle In either case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint the belts provide 1 30 A CAUTION Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in eve
107. 1 OnStar System 0 nenene nrnna 2 40 New Vehicle Break In cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 iti iti Universal Home Remote System 2 42 Ignition PoSitiONS 0 00 cece eeeeeeee nett teeta ees 2 22 Uni i R te Svstem O ti 2 42 Retained Accessory Power RAP 06 2 23 NIVESA MOME MEME oy StS DEMON siger i 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls Storage Areas l enn 2 46 Cargo COVED sssini aesae GIOVE BOX Fac cae viccedect nen ass Eni T EE caine dhe 2 46 Cargo Management System ecceeeeeeeeee es Cupholder S csceeeeteeeteetseeteeeeeeien 2 46 SUNOG 0 0 eee cece cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaenees Cell Phone Storage Area n 2 46 Sunroof UItraVIOW ce ceeecccccccceeeeseee eee eeeees Front Storage Area n e 2 46 Sunroof UltraView PIUS c cccecceeeeeseeeereeees Center Console Storage Area eeeeeeeee es 2 46 ney Luggage Carrier cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 47 Vehicle Personalization eae hie tes eae Convenience Net eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 2 48 Memory Seat and Mirrors seeeeeeees Keys A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The children or others could be badly injured or even killed Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children One key
108. 2006 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M Seats and Restraint Systems 006 1 1 Front Seats edice a a A RERE 1 2 Rear Seals asasicnocsiiceoiuca inenen nnr onana 1 9 Safety Bells cicnesstsscamevcanhadeeceancidtoeaaedsacas 1 11 Child Restraints onononnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnrnnne 1 28 Airbag System oo cece eeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 50 Restraint System Check cece eee eee eee ee 1 62 Features and Controls 2 ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 KEYS sisrceiscwssiondsnceatatlisveandcar totes abechddeaeea 2 3 Doors and LOCKS sescsersein ged enaa E antares 2 8 WINdOWS Je ccd ecedtastinacadyetes atwrecdealeseshantivs 2 14 Theft Deterrent Systems o oo eee eee eee eee ees 2 18 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 21 NOES peos See SaN 2 35 OnStar System eessssssiiiiiieresrrrrrrrrrrer 2 40 Universal Home Remote System 2 42 Storage Areas dv ccceadsaiateeGecheiieiesehaecetisiexs 2 46 SUNON ae N tae 2 48 Vehicle Personalization oo cece cece ec ee cena eens 2 52 Instrument Panel 0 ccccceeseeeeeee sees sees eenees 3 1 Instrument Panel Overview _ c0cceeeee 3 4 Climate Controls oo ccc ccc ec ecc ee ee cence ene 3 25 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators _ 3 33 Driver Information Center DIC 3 48 Audio System s Driving Your Vehicle 0ccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 Your Drivin
109. 38 Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away Canada BRAKE United States This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 50 A CAUTION Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service Anti Lock Brake System Warning Ligh
110. 5 000 km since your last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 22 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I your second service be Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 16 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 22 An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components See footnote a ee Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote g a ee Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24
111. 93 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Place de Ville Tower C 330 Sparks Street Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you will notify us Please call us at 1 800 458 8006 or write Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 In Canada please call us at 1 888 446 2000 Or write Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre 163 005 General Motors of Canada Limited 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifi
112. Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts 1 23 Lap Shoulder Belt All rear seat positions have lap shoulder belts Here is how to wear one properly 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure 1 24 When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 28 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder part S GAAT ANY ON SY The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slid
113. CS Warning 3 40 Lighting EMY esecudumsncyanmsinsehuieaeieetn casters EA 3 19 Parade DIMMING iicn 3 20 Limited Slip Rear Axle ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 4 10 Loading Your Vehicle sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 45 LOCKOUT Protecto siisdinaniaemr onenian aiii 2 11 Locks Central Door Unlocking System seseceeeeeeeen 2 9 Delayed Locking e eceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenes 2 9 DOOM yieee a 12 E E E dk tates a A 2 8 Lockout Protection eceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 2 11 Locks cont Power DOO ccecceceeececeeeeeeeeteeenseeneneeeeenes 2 9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS e eeeeeeeeeee ees 2 10 Loss Of Control cccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeenees 4 16 Luggage Carrier issiron iinr araon Ea 2 47 Lumbar Power Controls cccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 1 3 Magnetic Ride Control cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services eeeeeeee 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill iaccsccisscteticctocste neresi 6 9 At Least Once a Month cccccceeeeeeeeaees 6 9 At Least Once a Year ccc cece ecccneeeaeaeeeeeees 6 10 INTFOGUCTION screen ere rrari aE 6 2 Maintenance Footnotes ccccceceseeeeeeeeneee 6 7 Maintenance Record csccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 15 Maintenance Requirements ccccceceneneee 6 2 Normal Maintenance Replaceme
114. Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock brakes you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Control System TCS Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions On a rear wheel drive vehicle the system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction On an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle the system will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system brakes the spinning wheel s and or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal This warning light will come on to let you know if there s a problem with your traction control system See Traction Control System TCS Warning Light on page 3 40 When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the traction control s
115. Driver Shift Control DSC under Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 26 for more information 3 45 Security Light For information regarding this light see Theft Deterrent System on page 2 18 Fog Lamp Light 0 The fog lamps light will come on when the fog lamps are in use The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 3 18 for more information 3 46 Lights On Reminder This light comes on whenever the parking lamps are on See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3 17 for more information Cruise Control Light This light comes on y whenever you set your cruise control The light will go out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 12 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on whenever the high beam headlamps are on See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 for more information Fuel Gage The fuel gage shows approximately how much fuel is in the tank It works only when the ignition is in ON If the fuel supply gets low the Fuel Level Low message will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information Here are a few concerns some owners have had about the fuel gage All of these situations are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage e At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage read
116. E 2 9 Electrical System csserneorarnanasi sneins 5 96 bitate rasa e E a 2 12 Lumbar Controls cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee iia 1 3 Retained Accessory RAP lecce 2 23 OO sap ca A E E EEE E A E ne seman 1 2 Steering Fluid spiecsd ncsniinesd cahewnssmnceneatiaccemey sence 5 37 WINDOWS creanga nae e 2 15 Pretensioners Safety Belt cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 28 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 10 Q Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 15 FRAGIOS chascar nies ieena ne e e AAEE 3 80 Care of Your CD and DVD Player 3 113 Care of Your CDs and DVDs 0 3 113 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual s asss a ean acne 3 98 Radio With CD iracion ae n na 3 82 Setting the Time cceseeeeeneseeeneeeeeneees 3 81 Theft Deterrent cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 111 Understanding Reception cece 3 112 Reading Lamps a iscscccccivesgieviest sheacecasiancaeeaeintas 3 20 Rear Air Conditioning System 0 eeeeeeeeeee 3 31 Rear AxIG cic ciei crs cieuteanaeien adiiivesaaveevane aes 5 49 Limited Slip sacehecacnegessateaestaaneeestccateancsanawates 4 10 Rear Door Security Locks eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 10 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 1 26 Rear Seat Entertainment System 8 3 98 Rear Seat Operation ccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeee ee 1 9 Rear Seat Passengers Safety Bel
117. Example A Tire Size The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 68 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maxi
118. I Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects eee 7 14 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 008 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects to the Online Owner Center ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 7 4 United States Government eeeeeeeees 7 14 Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the Telephone TTY Users annei 7 4 Canadian Government eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 14 Customer Assistance Offices cceeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Reporting Safety Defects to GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 6 General Motors n eia rannani 7 15 Roadside Service 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 6 Service Publications Ordering Courtesy Transportation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 8 Intomart 7 15 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders secesiunii oriei 7 10 Collision Damage Repair ceeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 7 11 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or t
119. IT SEAT is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear in the box next to the feature name 3 70 The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Twilight Delay This feature allows you to set the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit the vehicle Programmable Modes Mode 1 0 00 seconds Mode 2 0 15 seconds Mode 3 0 30 seconds Mode 4 1 00 minute Mode 5 1 30 minutes Mode 6 2 00 minutes Mode 7 2 30 minutes Mode 8 3 00 minutes Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since the vehicle left the factory To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until TWILIGHT DELAY is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to scroll through and select the available delay settings If you choose Mode 1 the exterior lamps will not illuminate when you exit the vehicle Only one mode can be selected at a time The mode you selected is now set You can
120. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You will find this label in the passenger side rear storage compartment or at the lower edge of the liftgate It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label you will find the following e VIN e Model designation e Paint information e Production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle 5 95 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 61 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker If
121. It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll There are several different positions for the shift lever Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into Park P PARK P Thi ition locks th heel on page 2 30 If you are pulling a trailer see This position locks the rear wheels Towina a Trail 4 52 It is the best position to use when you start the bisa ailer on page 4 5 engine because your vehicle cannot move easily 2 26 Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition key is in ON If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever Push the shift lever all the way into PARK P while pressing the button on the shift lever as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of Park P on page 2 32 Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the tra
122. Locks Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on your vehicle from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door You must open the rear doors to access them To use these locks do the following 1 Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door security lock label and turn it to engage the lock 2 Close the door 3 Repeat the steps for the other rear door The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter the front door power lock switch or by lifting the rear door manual lock 2 Then open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door security lock label and turn it to disengage the lock 3 Repeat the steps for the other lock The rear door locks will now work normally Lockout Protection If you press the power door lock switch when the key is in the ignition and any door is open all the doors will lock and only the driver s door will unlock If you close the doors you can lock them using the remote keyless entry transmitter Be sure to remove the key from the ignit
123. Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION A CAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed A CAUTION or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the Things that burn can get on hot engine parts inside of the fill opening before operating and start a fire These include liquids like fuel the nozzle Contact should be maintained oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer until the filling is complete and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or e Do not smoke while pumping gasoline others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Hood Release To open the hood do the following ee 1 a 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the secondary hood release lever The lever is located under the front edge of the grille near the
124. OnStar Personal Calling refer to the OnStar User s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit www onstar com or www onstar ca or speak to an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Virtual Advisor Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor It is a feature of OnStar Personal Calling that uses your minutes to access weather local traffic reports and sports updates By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice commands you can browse through the various topics Customize your information profile at www myonstar com See the OnStar user s guide for more information 2 44 Universal Home Remote System Ceo The Universal Home Remote System a combined universal transmitter and receiver provides a way to replace up to three hand held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators garage door openers entry door locks security systems and home lighting If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home Remote Transmitter it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your vehicle has this feature the control buttons are located on the driver s sun visor 2 42 This device complies with RSS 210 of Indu
125. See Shifting Into Park P on page 2 30 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror with OnStar controls For more information about OnStar see OnStar System on page 2 40 Q On Off The on off button located on the lower left side of the mirror is used for the automatic dimming functions of the rearview mirror Mirror Operation The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the vehicle is started Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off press and release the on off button The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is on Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar and Compass The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror with a compass and OnStar controls For more information about OnStar see OnStar System on page 2 40 The mirror has an eight point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror When on the compass automatically calibrates or sets the driving direction as the vehicle is driven If the ve
126. Sunroof UltraView Plus A CAUTION People who are in a crash and not wearing a safety belt properly can suffer much worse injuries They can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it and be seriously injured or killed This is true for any vehicle occupant in any motor vehicle but if you have the Ultraview roof it is if anything even more important In a rollover or other crash the Ultraview roof can be damaged or destroyed People who are unbelted would then be at even greater risk of being ejected from the vehicle Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too 2 50 The vehicle may have an UltraView sunroof over the first two rows of seats and a smaller sunroof over the third row seat Both have sunshades but the back sunroof does not open The sunroof sunshade switches are located in the headliner between the driver and front passenger One switch operates the front sunroof and another switch operates the front sunshade The third switch is for the rear sunshade Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the sunroof Press the switch to the first stop to open the sunroof to a desired position Press the switch to the second stop to express open the sunroof to a preset comfort stop Press the switch at the second stop again to express open the sunroof completely Press the front of the sunroof switch to close the sunroof Press the switch to the
127. The disc will be stored in the DVD player The DVD player will not resume play of the disc automatically DVD Messages The following errors may be displayed on the video screen Disc Format Error This message will be displayed if a disc is inserted upside down if the disc is not readable or if the disc format is not compatible The disc will be automatically ejected from the DVD player e Load Eject Error This message will be displayed if the disc is not properly loaded or ejected e Disc Play Error This message will be displayed if the DVD player cannot play the disc Severely scratched or damaged discs will cause this error The disc will be automatically ejected from the DVD player 3 104 e Region Code Error This message will be displayed if the region code of the DVD is not compatible with the DVD player The disc will be automatically ejected from the DVD player e No Disc This message will be displayed if the PLAY button is pressed and no disc is in the player Parental Control Button This button is located on the navigation system screen Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the audio The video screen will display Parental Control ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player will flash It will also disable all other button operations from the remote control and the DVD player with the exception of the eject button The driver will then be able to gain the attent
128. The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and have more power Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place FOURTH 4 This position is also used for normal driving However it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D Here are examples for using FOURTH 4 instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D e When driving on hilly winding roads e When going down a steep hill This position may also offer improved trailer towing performance in certain driving conditions 2 28 Driver Shift Control DSC Notice If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control DSC you could damage your vehicle Always upshift when necessary while using DSC Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control DSC feature that allows you to change gears similar to a manual transmission To use the DSC feature 1 Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D to the right into the DSC area When the transmission is in DSC mode the sport mode light in the instrument panel cluster will come on If you do not move the shift lever forward or rearward the vehicle will be in sport mode When you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still shift automatically
129. Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pushing the button on the shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P listed previously If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P 2 31 Shifting Out of Park P Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in ON See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 26 for more information If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease the pressure on the shift lever Push the shift lever all the way into PARK P while pushing the button on the shift lever as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want If you ever hold the pedal down but
130. V6 Engine Vehicles Only e GM6094M Your vehicle s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M You should look for and use iat WEIR only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M aes e SAE 5W 30 LOOK FOR As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is THIS SYMBOL oR best for your vehicle AND GM STANDARD GM6094M These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API You should look for this information on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide
131. Wet Roads on page 4 32 for more information on driving through water 4 29 After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information 4 30 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Do not drink and drive Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you cannot see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your vehicle s headlamps can light up only so much road ahead In remote areas watch for animals If you are tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50
132. a TTY ora conventional teletypewriter can communicate with Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada 1 888 889 2438 daily 24 hours Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair 7 8 Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait H
133. a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you are driving brake normally but do not pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will
134. acity to stay within GCWR limits Your maximum trailer would only be 7 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think you must limit tongue weight to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR 4 56 But you must still consider the effect on the rear axle Because your rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg you can only put 900 Ibs 408 kg on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves you with being able to handle only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight you can expect that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads
135. act XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 CLOCK INFO DISP Clock Information Display Press the CLOCK INFO DISP button to switch between the clock display the XM screen and the XM information display Press this button while in XM mode to retrieve three different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title and Category To view this information perform the following 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until CLOCK INFO DISP appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select CLOCK INFO DISP The display will change to show the additional XM information 4 To return to the original display press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out If the CLOCK INFO DISP is configured into one of the configurable keys pressing the key will switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time See Configurable Radio Display Keys later in this section for more information Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume AVC Automatic Volume Compensation Available only with the premium Bose audio system AVC which utilizes Bose AudioPilot noise compensation technology continuously adjusts the audio system equalization to compensate for background noise so that your music al
136. ades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning liquid or powder and water solution The windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn 5 91 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice If you use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels you could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use only GM approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive clean
137. age 5 66 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information 5 68 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditio
138. al injury When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it 1 38 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We therefore recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Here is why A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to se
139. alternate with the channel 0 XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there should only be if may be a receiver fault Consult with your GM dealer hardware failure Check XM Receiver Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver may have a fault Consult with your GM dealer 3 92 Using the Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in If the ignition and the radio are on the CD will begin playing A CD may be loaded with the radio off but it will not start playing until the radio is on If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it will stay in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD will start to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When the CD is inserted CD will appear on the display As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in
140. amage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near frontal impacts For side impact airbags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact What Makes an Airbag Inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the airbag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash In the case of a rollover capable roof mounted side impact airbag the sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to roll over The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the airbag The inflator airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel instrument panel the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door and the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows 1 58 How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle The airbag supplements the protection provided by safety belts Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions includin
141. an service the theft deterrent system to have a new key made It is possible for the theft deterrent system decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle This procedure is for learning additional keys only Canadian Owners If you lose or damage your keys only a GM dealer can service the theft deterrent system to have new keys made To program additional keys you will require two current driver s keys You must add a step to the following procedure After Step 2 repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver s key Then continue with Step 3 To program a new key do the following 1 Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it 2 Insert the current driver s key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON within ten seconds of removing the previous key 5 The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed It may not be apparent that the security light went on due to how quickly the key is programmed 6 Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you are ever driving and the security light comes on and stays on you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off The theft deterrent system however
142. ance and fade features of the audio system For more information see Setting the Tone Bass Treble and Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade under Radio with CD on page 3 82 d EQ Equalizer This menu item allows you to choose among five preset equalizations for the audio system See Audio Equalizer under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information DSP Digital Signal Processing If your vehicle has a Bose radio this menu item allows you to select the DSP type that you want on the audio system You may choose Normal Talk Spacious Rear Seat or Driver Seat Press the TUNE SEL knob to scroll through these choices Once the desired choice is displayed turn the knob to set your DSP choice and continue scrolling through the main menu See Using DSP under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information 3 54 DVD Digital Versatile Disc This menu item allows you to turn the DVD on and off Press the TUNE SEL knob once to turn DVD on and off When DVD is on an X will be in the box next to DVD on the menu The X disappears when DVD is off See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3 98 for more information AVC Automatic Volume Compensation If your vehicle has a Bose radio this menu item allows you to turn the AVC feature on and off Press the TUNE SEL knob once to turn AVC on and off When AVC is on an X will be in the box next to AVC on the menu The X disappears when AVC is off
143. and Indicators 3 33 Turn and Lane Change Signals e 3 8 Instrument Panel Cluster 00000c0ccceeeeeeeeees 3 34 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 3 8 Speedometer and Odometer 0 cceee 3 35 Flash to Pass E E E 3 9 Trip Odometers sccc cicsccecceceeesec cectancstantescacat 3 35 Windshield Wipers sseet tees eeeeeeeees 3 9 TACHOMEIEN simiseysiin ranoo aa ent E 3 36 Windshield Washer south T E E O ET 3 10 Engine Speed Limiter 0 00cccceeeeeseeeeeeees 3 36 Rear Window Wiper WaSher s in ol Safety Belt Reminder Light ccceceee 3 36 Headlamp Washer seein 3 12 Airbag Readiness Light csseereeeeeee 3 37 Cruise Control cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeaes 3 12 Charging System Light c ccce ceccceeseereeeeees 3 38 Headlamps E E A S 3 16 Brake System Warning Light 00 c 00ceee 3 38 Wiper Activated Headlamps eeeeeeeees 3 16 Anti Lock Brake System Headlamps on Reminder s sees 3 17 Warning Light cccceseeeeeeeeseeteeeeteeees 3 39 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 00ccee 3 17 Traction Control System TCS Fog Lamps a ht etatsniectesteanids iis 3 18 Warning Light RiP eee aCe eden et teen E E 3 40 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver e 3 19 Engine Coolant Temperature Instrument Panel Brightness eceeeeee 3 19 Warning Light o s 3 40 Entry Lighting E A T 3 19
144. and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 76 If the spare tire will not lower the secondary latch may be engaged causing the tire not to lower Do the following to check the cable 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible If it is not visible see Secondary Latch System on page 5 81 If it is visible first try to tighten the cable by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot over tighten the cable Loosen the cable then by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns Tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times if the spare tire has not lowered If the spare tire did lower to the ground continue with Step 4 under Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 74 If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground see Secondary Latch System on page 5 81 5 75 Removing the Flat Tire and 2 Find the jacking location using the Installing the Spare Tire hoisting notches aah To remove the flat tire and install the spare do the Sr a l AA following in the plastic molding are marked with a triangle shape to help you find them H 3 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never 1 Loosen the wheel nuts but do not remove them get under a
145. and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle like other
146. ants To read this information special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than e with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee e in response to an official request of police or similar government office e as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or e as required by law In addition once GM collects or receives data GM may e use the data for GM research needs e make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown or e share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non GM organizations for research purposes Others such as law enforcement may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar please check the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for information on its operations and data collection Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety p
147. appear on the display Press the up arrow to scan to the next station The radio will go to a station play for 5 seconds then go on to the next station Press this button again to stop scanning 3 84 To scan preset stations press and hold SCAN for more than two seconds until you hear a beep and PSCAN appears on the display The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your firm keys play for 5 seconds then go on to the next preset station Press SCAN again to stop scanning presets The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band LOCAL DISTANT Selection With this feature you can set the radio to search for local stations or stations that are further away for a larger selection To set this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT perform the following steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until SEEK LOCAL or SEEK DISTANT appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select either LOCAL or DISTANT 4 Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out To search for stations press the SEEK up or down arrows If the system is set to LOCAL SEEK will appear in the display and seek to stations with strong signals only If the system is set to DISTANT D SEEK will appear in the display and seek to stations with weak and strong signals Set
148. ar Axle iaoee 4 10 StabiliTrak System cccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeees 4 11 Panic Brake ASSIST iesi ices ete scek conten entire tsb canciones 4 11 All Wheel Drive AWD System n 4 12 STEEN aroen na aaee E E E 4 12 Off Road Recovery sosimsrsirsersiksiiiareni craris 4 14 Passings iea iea dies a a a Ga 4 14 Loss of Control aleen iaennninierensa aia 4 16 Off Road DIVING asie sacesc oinnes oera tenite nanni 4 17 Driving At NIQMt svcccctseec sede iao easiteaddataimnonnaed 4 30 Driving Your Vehicle Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 32 City DIVING txccaconketcdtin cee aena i aeaea eia 4 34 Freeway Driving ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 35 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 0e 4 36 Highway Hypnosis ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 37 Hill and Mountain Roads ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 37 Winter Driving suissa coves cecascxcddencineiin Ga cued 4 39 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud IGS OF SNOW sss esc neccictapesacaeas arnbaii 4 43 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 4 44 Recovery HOOK fe c0ciic icahceintenieunanentnesateneded 4 44 Loading Your Vehicle c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 45 MOWING 22 staccdccaniiwccaecnaehepiaeededs ed ukeumagetinetes eens 4 50 Towing Your Vehicle ccceeeeeeeeee eee ee eens 4 50 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeee 4 50 Level Control 2 0 00 ccececceeeeeeneee tea eeeeeaeeee
149. ar from the display F6 DISP Display Press this firm key to display the time of the track Press this firm key again to display CD PLAY and press this firm key once more to clear the display A SEEK V Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous track on the CD A SCAN Press this button to listen to each track for 10 seconds The CD will go to a track play for 10 seconds then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning A Eject Press this button to eject the CD that is currently playing or press and hold this button to eject all of the CDs loaded You will hear a beep Eject may be activated with the ignition or radio off CD Messages If the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e If it is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e If you are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your GM dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem Config
150. are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow e The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper e Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle See Engine Exhaust on page 2 33 Dirt and water can too Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig And never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If you tow more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg use trailer brakes Because your vehicle has anti lock brakes don t try to tap into your vehicle s hydraulic brake system If you do both brake systems won t work well or at all Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
151. ascals KPA To change the units see DIC Main Menu on page 3 53 RR TIRE If you select this item the passenger s side rear tire pressure will be displayed If the tire pressure is low LOW will be displayed with this item The pressure can be displayed in pounds per square inch PSI or kilopascals KPA To change the units see DIC Main Menu on page 3 53 LR TIRE If you select this item the drivers side rear tire pressure will be displayed If the tire pressure is low LOW will be displayed with this item The pressure can be displayed in pounds per square inch PSI or kilopascals KPA To change the units see DIC Main Menu on page 3 53 BLANK LINE If you select this item nothing is displayed at the top of the screen DIC Main Menu Accessing the DIC Main Menu To access the main menu of the DIC do the following 1 2 Press the TUNE SEL knob once Turn the TUNE SEL knob clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through the menu items The DIC main menu consists of the following menu items 2 BASS MID TREBLE d EQ DSP Bose Radio DVD AVC Bose Radio H A AUTOSTORE PRESETS CAT TA MSG RECALL RDS MESSAGE AF SEEK LOCAL DISTANT wae English Metric Units TCS C Clock 1 Clock Information Display SETUP DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions d BASS MID Midrange TREBLE This menu item allows you to adjust the levels for the bass midrange treble bal
152. at may not be covered by your warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light does not come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required If the Light is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle e Reducing vehicle speed e Avoiding hard accelerations e Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains o
153. attery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal 5 47 All Wheel Drive All of the lubricant checks in this section apply to your vehicle If you have an all wheel drive vehicle there is an additional system that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired 5 48 How to Check Lubricant A Drain Plug B Fill Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hol
154. ay be found on the vehicle LATCH BOTH LAP AND CAUTION SHOULDER BELTS TO MRTT Cy ENGINE POSSIBLE LIGHTING TIRE PROTECT OCCUPANT COOLANT N PRESSURE INJURY DO NOT TWIST SAFETY SWITCH 2 TEMP BELT WHEN ATTACHING ACCESS SHIELDING SEAT CHARGING BELTS SYSTEM PARKING 00 aia MOVE SEAT Nao DO NOT INSTALL LAMPS NUS ENGINE ruy Yey _AREAR FAcING BRAKE Q COOLANT PROTECT TURN len m FUSE EYES BY FASTEN SIGNALS BATTERY EA BOX ACID COULD ILD RESTRAI CAUSE REARWARD gu Lo CHILD RESTRAINT N SECURE IN THIS SEATING HAZARD ene CHILD SEAT POSITION WARNING FLASHER COOLANT PSA PELSER e DO NOT INSTALL A SPAT N RoT FORWARD FACING FLAMES COMPLETELY v DAYTIME O FAN THEN SECURE CHILD RESTRAINT RUNNING IN THIS SEATING sss CHILD SEAT LAMPS SPARK OR POSITION FLAME COULD power Mk 5 DOOR LOCK FOG ANTI LOCK SERVICE EARLODE winpow UNLOCK LAMPS BRAKES MANUAL BATTERY ENGINE OIL D7 OWNER S PRESSURE MANUAL 4 NOTES vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats ccccc ccccccceececeseen ee seeeedeeeeneecnedteeees 1 2 Child Restraints cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 1 28 Manual Passenger Seat ccceeeeeeneeeeeeeee es 1 2 Older Children ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeee es 1 28 Power Sealse e an a i EEE 1 2 Infants and Young Children eeeeeeeeees 1 31 Power Lumbar secen an aE ESERE 1 3 Child Restraint Systems c eceee
155. ay while the system is armed will activate the alarm when a door or the liftgate is opened If you activate the alarm by accident unlock the driver s door with your key You can also turn off the alarm by using the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by starting the vehicle with a valid key Testing the Alarm 1 From inside the vehicle roll down the window then get out of the vehicle keeping the door open 2 From outside of the vehicle with the door open lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter and close the door Wait approximately 30 seconds until the security light goes off 3 Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock and open the door The horn will sound and the exterior lamps will flash You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver s door with your key using the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by starting the car with a valid key If the alarm does not sound when it should check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 96 If the fuse does not need to be replaced you may need to have your vehicle serviced To reduce the possibility of theft always arm the theft deterrent system when leaving your vehicle Immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two condition
156. badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency This message will appear when there is a low level of engine coolant Have the cooling system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible See Engine Coolant on page 5 26 for more information Check Gas Cap When this message appears on the display the gas cap has not been fully tightened You should recheck the gas cap to ensure that it is on and tightened properly See If the Light Is On Steady under Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 for more information Check Tire Pressure This message indicates that one or more of the vehicle s tires are low See Status of Vehicle Systems on page 3 49 for information on checking your vehicle s tire pressures Also see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 62 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 for more information Check Washer Fluid When this message appears on the display it means that your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid You should refill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 38 for more information Driver Door Ajar When this message appears on the display it means that the driver s door was not closed completely You should make sure that the driver s door is closed completely 3 59
157. be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach such as around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you do not have blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm 4 41 You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 42 A CAUTION Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not
158. be on or off 2 Press and release the LOAD button Please Wait will appear on the display 3 Load the CD when INSERT appears on the display insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in When a CD is inserted CD will appear on the display the number of the CD and the track number will appear on the display if the radio is on If the radio is on the CD will begin to play automatically To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can be on or off 2 Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds Please Wait will appear on the display and you will hear a beep 3 Load the CD when INSERT appears on the display insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in Do not try to load two CDs at one time and wait to load a CD until INSERT appears on the display for each disc inserted The CD player will take up to six CDs Do not try to load more than six If you want to load less than six CDs load the desired amount The CD player will time out when it does not receive any more CDs and the last CD loaded will begin to play If the radio is on the last CD loaded will begin to play automatically F1 CD Down Press this firm key to go to the previous CD F2CD Up Press this firm key to go to the next CD 3 95 CD REV lt Reverse Press this firm key to go to the previous track Press and hold this firm key to revers
159. bject into the hole in the steering column cover and press the spring 4 Then turn the ignition switch to OFF and remove the key Retained Accessory Power RAP The following accessories on your vehicle may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned from ON to OFF e Radio e Power Windows e Audio Steering Wheel Controls e Sunroof Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or if a door is opened If you want power for another 10 minutes close all the doors and turn the ignition key to ON and then back to OFF 2 23 Starting the Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine will not start in any other position that is a safety feature To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Notice Do not try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START Then let go of the key the engine will start automatically The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm 2 If your engine will not start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you turn the key to START If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing Notice Your engine is designed t
160. call the stored exit positions press and release the exit button One beep will sound and the seat will move to the previously stored exit position for the currently identified driver If an exit position has not been stored for this driver the seat will move all the way back The position of the outside mirrors is not stored or recalled for the exit position The vehicle must be in PARK P to recall the exit positions Three chimes will sound and the exit setting will not be recalled if you press the exit button when the vehicle is not in PARK P If you would like your stored exit position to be recalled when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter or when the ignition is turned off and the driver s door is opened see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 2 53 4 NOTES 2 54 Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview neee 3 4 Climate Controls cece ence eee eee eee 3 25 Hazard Warning Flashers c eeeeeeeneeeee ees 3 6 Dual Climate Control System eeeeeeee 3 25 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 3 6 Outlet Adjustment 0cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 30 Honeen nae nace nengatnis O 3 6 Rear Air Conditioning System 00 3 31 Tilt Wheel sereisas Reka EN 3 7 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 3 32 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ss ssssrseeee 3 7 Warning Lights Gages
161. cations for GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle In Canada information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1 800 GM DRIVE 1 800 463 7483 Owner s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Cust
162. child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints Child Restraint Systems An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 1 35 A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 36 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window How do child restraints work A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint sy
163. child restraint in the third row if a national or local law requires that a top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the restraint say that the top tether must be anchored If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say A CAUTION In a crash a child secured in a rear facing child restraint in the center rear seating position could be injured by the vehicle s armrest To reduce this risk the armrest should first be secured with a special armrest retention strap You can get this from your dealer If you are using a rear facing child restraint in the second row center position install the armrest retention strap 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 45 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 46 6 If your child restraint has a top tether and the position that you are using has a top teth
164. cles press and hold the button If your vehicle is low on washer fluid the Check Washer Fluid message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information If the headlamps are on when you wash the windshield the headlamp washer if equipped will turn on Both the windshield and the headlamps will be washed See Headlamp Washer on page 3 12 Rear Window Wiper Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision The switch for the rear washer wiper is located in the overhead console Rear Wiper Press this side of the button to turn the rear wiper on 5 Washer Fluid Press this button to wash and wipe the window The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer However the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer If you can wash your windshield but not your rear windows check the fluid level Delay Press this side of the button to turn on delayed wiping To turn either the delay or rear wiper setting off press the opposite side of the button to turn it to the off position Pressing the button all the way down on either side will activate a wiper setting Headlamp Washer Your vehicle may have headlamp washers The headlamp washers clear debris f
165. considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer If you do here are some important points e There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police e Consider using a sway control You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls e Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Don t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on your vehicle s parts Three important considerations have to do with weight e the weight of the trailer e the weight of the trailer tongue e and the total weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer a
166. coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle 5 33 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you have not found a problem yet check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant on page 5 26 for more information A CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
167. correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load If you will be driving at high speeds speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall or 38 psi 265 kPa whichever is lower See the example following 5 62 When you end this high speed driving return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 Example You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire s sidewall in small letters near the rim flange It will read something like this Maximum load 690 kg 1521 Ibs 300 kPa 44 psi Max Press For this example you would set the inflation pressure for high speed driving at 38 psi 265 kPa Tire Pressure Monitor System Your vehicle may have this feature The Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels If your vehicle has this feature sensors are mounted on each tire and wheel assembly except for the compact spare tire and wheel Tire pressure readings are sent to a receiver located in the vehicle once every 60 seconds while the vehicle is being driven and once every 60 minutes if the vehicle is stationary for more than 15 minutes Using the Driver Information Center DIC tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional inf
168. cure the child restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Your vehicle has the LATCH system The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains
169. d device To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming Universal Home Remote You do not want to repeat Step 1 as this will erase all previous programming from the Universal Home Remote buttons 2 44 Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming Similarly some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming Universal Home Remote procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming Universal Home Remote with the following Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and release every two seconds cycle the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming Universal Home Remote to complete Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being
170. d slush Other conditions that may affect system performance include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck If after cleaning the rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph 25 km h the display continues to flash red see your dealer If a trailer was attached to your vehicle or a bicycle or an object was on the back of or hanging out of your liftgate during your last drive cycle the light may also flash red The light will continue to flash whenever in REVERSE R until your vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph 25 km h without any obstructions behind the vehicle For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 90 Accessory Power Oultlet s Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone CB radio etc Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center console on the instrument panel one in the rear of the center console one in the rear compartment and there may be an additional outlet in the rear of the center console Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be removed to access the accessory power outlet If it does when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap Notice Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do
171. damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If you want to do some of your own service work you will want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 61 You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record on page 6 15 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of the i
172. dio and video sources are available for selection with the SRCE button when in all speaker e Rear Video The RSE unit will only control what is seen on the rear display and what is heard through the headphones HM Stop Press this button to stop playing a DVD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD Play Pause Press this button to turn the DVD player on to start play of a DVD or CD and to switch between play and pause of a DVD or CD Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu This button only operates with a DVD If your vehicle is equipped with the TV option the menu button will display a TV specific menu L Display Menu Press this button to modify the video screen display characteristics A v lt 5 gt Menu Navigation Use the arrow keys to navigate through a menu 4 Enter Press this button to select items within a menu If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system after pressing the SRCE button the enter button can select all speaker or rear video See the SRCE button previously for more information Audio Video Jack See Stereo RCA Jacks earlier in this section for more information O Headphone Jack These jacks allow you to listen to the RSE through wired headphones not included Headphone Volume Turn the left knob to increase the volume of the headphone connected to the left headphone jack Turn the right knob to increase
173. displayed To reduce the charging overload use the vehicle s accessories Turn on the exterior lamps and radio set the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on the highest setting and turn the rear window defogger on The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts when the engine is running You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until BATTERY VOLTS appears 3 57 Battery Voltage Low This message will appear when the electrical system is charging less than 10 volts or if the battery has been drained If this message appears immediately after starting the engine it is possible that the generator can still recharge the battery The battery should recharge while driving but may take a few hours to do so Consider using an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning home or to a final destination Make sure you follow the manufacturer s instructions If this message appears while driving or after starting your vehicle and stays on have it checked by your GM dealer immediately to determine the cause of this problem To help the generator recharge the battery quickly you can reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off the accessories The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until BATTERY VOLTS appears 3 58 Change Engine Oil This message indicates that the life
174. do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be within the HOT mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 5 37 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC when the fluid level is low See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location 5 38 Notice e When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water e Do not mix water with ready t
175. downhill 4 24 Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you will want to consider a number of things e How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain vehicle control e What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel e Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help the brakes and they will not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times Q Am likely to stall when going downhill A CAUTION Itis much more likely to happen going uphill But if it happens going downhill here is what to do Heavy braking when going down a hill can 1 Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes cause your brakes to overheat and fade This Apply the parking brake could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when 2 Ai P and while still braking restart descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control 3 Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down 4 If the engine will not start get out and get help Q Are there some things should not do when driving down a
176. downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more 4 26 For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over A CAUTION Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead Q What if am driving across an incline that is not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should I do a If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline A CAUTION be sure you and any passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out
177. e located on the rear axle you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant A Drain Plug B Filler Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 5 50 If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the front axle you may need to add some lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Bulb Replacement It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by your dealer High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting A CAUTION The low beam high intensity discharge lighting system operates at a very high voltage If you try to service any of the system components you could be seriously injured Have your dealer or a qualified technician service them Your vehicle may have HID headlamps After your vehicle s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced you may notice that the beam is a slightly
178. e It has a GVWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg anda GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg GCWR Vehicle Weight 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg Trailer Rating You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 386 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 Ibs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 lbs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 lbs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg 4 55 But let s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well You may add 300 Ibs 136 kg to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight Your vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg and you may think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds 318 kg from your trailering cap
179. e cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 42 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt 5 42 Jump Starting If your vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely A CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds t
180. e guide on top 1 26 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1 23 Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides Slide the guide back on its storage clip located on the seatback 1 27 Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger Although you cannot see them they are located on the buckle end of the safety belts They help the safety belts reduce a person s forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash Pretensioners work only once If they activate in a crash you will need to get new ones and probably other new parts for your safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 63 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer will order you an extender It is free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat y
181. e quickly within the track Release the firm key to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display CD FWD gt Forward Press this firm key to go to the next track Press and hold this firm key to advance quickly within the track Release the firm key to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display F5 MODE Press this firm key to select from NORMAL RPT TRCK Repeat Track RPT CD Repeat CD RDM TRK Random Track and RDM ALL Random All CDs e NORMAL Sets the system for normal play of the CD s NORMAL will not appear on the display when in this mode e RPT TRCK Repeat Track Repeats the track over again RPT TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE firm key again to turn off repeat play RPT TRCK will disappear from the display e RPT CD Repeat CD Repeats the CD over again RPT DISC will appear on the display Press the MODE firm key again to turn off repeat play RPT DISC will disappear from the display 3 96 e RDM TRK Random Track Plays the tracks on the current CD in random rather than sequential order RDM TRK will appear on the display Press the MODE firm key again to turn off random play RDM TRK will disappear from the display RDM ALL Random All CDs Plays all of the CDs loaded in random rather than sequential order RDM ALL will appear on the display Press the MODE firm key again to turn off random play RDM ALL will disappe
182. e Engine Exhaust on page 2 33 Windows A CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Power Windows The power window switches are located on the armrest near each window Press the up or down arrows on the switches to raise or lower the windows Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP that allows you to use the power windows once the ignition has been turned off for up to 10 minutes See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 23 Express Down Window This feature is on all the power windows Press the down arrow on the switch to the second position to activate the express down feature If you want to stop the window as it is lowering press the down arrow on the switch again Express Up Window This feature is on both front power windows Press the up arrow on the switch to the second position to activate the express up feature If you want to stop the window as it is raising press the up arrow on the switch again Programming the Power Windows If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged disconnected or is not working you will need to reprogram each front power window for the express up feature t
183. e Hood 5 10 Hood Release 2 ccc ecseteaneeeencaetier enna neces 5 11 Engine Compartment Overview 5 12 Engine Olt sesgecs asntvactacdseacdicnaniveenategenetanceeneee 5 16 Engine Oil Life System ceeeeeeeeeeee eee e ees 5 22 Engine Air Cleaner Filter c eeeeeeeeeneee ees 5 24 Automatic Transmission Fluid eeeeeeee 5 25 Engine Coolant ieies 5 26 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap 00 5 29 Engine Overheating ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eters 5 29 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode iiaeie antata 5 31 Cooling SYSTEM serit oiae ariin nE a 5 32 Power Steering Fluid ccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 5 37 Windshield Washer Fluid eeeeeeeeee eee es 5 38 Brakes one r a A REES 5 39 BatiGhy ices iip esaia Eain ESES 5 42 JUMP SHANG isoen aih naei aa ahaee 5 42 All Wheel Drive 0 erer 5 48 Rear Axl i isisce iaaea aE 5 49 Front Axle 2 c cccencectsciatliteieieedibon naia 5 50 Bulb Replacement l n 5 50 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 50 Halogen BUDS ccct meet teve dean dctedicnreeneumeree as 5 51 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 51 MIKES sgrana E alauieenees 5 53 Tire Sidewall Labelling cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 54 Tire Terminology and Definitions 0 5 58 Inflation Tire Pressure cceeeeeeeee erences 5 60 Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 6 ee
184. e Plated Wheels Cleaning ssceviidnewirne tr A E EES 5 92 Buying New TIKES ccsccctccstieccsesnoety assaiar 5 66 CAINS 23 cctedchn dia dhcanenserdeanolotesnganaensecanreieaaens 5 71 Changing a Flat Tire ceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenee 5 72 Gleaning caserne anoen a EE a KEEA 5 92 Compact Spare Tire srsisrriinaernndenii iiri 5 86 Different S ZE s micans iraire eai ekon vee 5 68 If a Tire Goes Flat cece ceeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeee es 5 72 Inflation Tire Pressure 2 eeeeeeeeeee teers 5 60 Inspection and Rotation 5 65 Installing the Spare Tire cceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 76 Tires cont Pressure Monitor System ceeeeeeee eee ees 5 62 Removing the Flat Tire ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 5 76 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 74 Secondary Latch System ceeeeeeeee trees 5 81 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 83 Tire Sidewall Labelling ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 54 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 58 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ceeeeeeeee 5 68 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 70 Wheel Replacement cceeeeeeeeeenee eee eens 5 70 When It Is Time for New Tires accer 5 66 Towing Recreational Vehicle eseeeeeeeeeereeees 4 50 TOWING a Traller wiciecisencnee te amend steacw nieyeetededes 4 52 NOU VEhIGCIG 2225320 een E 4 50 Traction Control System TCS
185. e all wheel drive help make it much better suited for off road use Its higher ground clearance also helps your vehicle step over some off road obstacles But your vehicle does not have features like special underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear range things that are usually thought necessary for extended or severe off road service Also see Braking on page 4 6 Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you have left the North American road system behind Traffic lanes are not marked Curves are not banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you have gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that is why it is very important that you read this guide You will find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if equipped are properly attached Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving If you do not know you should check with law enforcement people in
186. e bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 93
187. e message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed Once the completed message has been displayed MSG will disappear from the display until another new message is received To display the last message perform the following steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until CLOCK INFO DISP appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob The message will appear on the display Once the message has been displayed MSG will disappear from the display until another new message is received TP Traffic Program TP will appear on the display when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that has traffic announcement broadcast capability TA Traffic Announcement If TA appears on the display the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned station you will hear it If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements when TA is turned on it will seek to a station that does When a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is found the radio will stop seeking and TA will appear on the display If no station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements No Traffic will appear on the display The radio will play traffic announcements if the volume is low The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements To turn TA on or off perform the f
188. e name General Motors of Canada Limited for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it appears in this manual Keep this manual in the vehicle so it will be there if it is needed while you are on the road If the vehicle is sold leave this manual in the vehicle Litho in U S A Part No O6SRX A First Printing Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If this is done it can help you learn about the features and controls for the vehicle Pictures and words work together in the owner manual to explain things 2005 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning A CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you do no
189. e outboard air outlets will always receive airflow regardless of the mode selected See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 30 to change this airflow from the outboard outlets 3 26 To change the current mode select one of the following 74 Vent This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets 74 Bi Level This mode directs approximately half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and then directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets Some air may be directed toward the windshield In automatic operation cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets ad Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard outlets for the side windows and a little air directed to the windshield The mode switch can also be used to select the defog mode Information on defogging and defrosting can be found later in this section V amp A Fan Press this switch to increase or decrease the fan speed Pressing this switch cancels automatic operation and places the system in manual mode Press AUTO to return to automatic operation If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the highest setting the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced For more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 32 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 lt gt Recirculation This mode keeps outside air from coming in
190. e regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only e To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer Usage Fluid Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol ve enone GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil on page 5 16 Usage Fluid Lubricant The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M Oils meeting this sta
191. e this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed exit position for the driver s seat when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until REMOTE EXIT RECALL is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If this feature is selected Remote Recall Memory cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Key in Recall Memory If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed seat and mirror positions when the key is inserted into the ignition Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode
192. e tire near you 5 77 8 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 7 Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench A CAUTION clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the compact spare tire to fit under Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to the vehicle which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off 5 78 10 Ti 12 Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 9 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Install the spare tire Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub 13 Lower the vehicle by attaching the wheel wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 5 79 14 Tighten the wheel nuts A CAUTION firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come of
193. e to lift the hood here is what located behind the vehicle s grille you will see A CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface 3 6L V6 shown 4 6L V8 similar A Electric Engine Cooling Fans B Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap 5 32 When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at or slightly above the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank If it is not you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system A CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle If there seems to be no leak with the engine on check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not your vehicle needs service Notice Engine damage from running your engine without
194. e under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle 1 25 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic cord must be under the belt Then place the guide Rear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safety over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt comfort for older children who have outgrown belt into the slots of the guide booster seats and for small adults When attached to a shoulder belt the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide available for each of the rear outside passenger positions in the second row Here is how to attach the comfort guide to the shoulder belt 1 Slide the guide off of its storage clip located on the seatback 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and th
195. e vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R Use this feature to view the curb when parallel parking When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R and after a five second delay the passenger s mirror will return to its original position If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted the mirror controls can be used See Outside Power Heated Mirrors on page 2 38 for more information Outside Convex Mirror A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so that more can be seen from the driver s seat The mirror does not have a dimming feature 2 39 OnStar System OnStar uses global positioning system GPS satellite technology wireless communications and live advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If your airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency where we can request emergency services be sent to your location If you lock your keys in the car call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock your doors if you need roadside assistance press the OnStar button and they will get yo
196. eaeees 4 51 TOWING a Trailer c2 cece sce cateneenectereesvetenees ieee 4 52 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle A CAUTION Defensive Driving Defensive driving really means Be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive expressways it means Always expect the defensively unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other Please start with a very important safety device in your drivers are going to be careless and make vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts They Are for mistakes Anticipate what they might do and Everyone on page 1 11 be ready Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a Collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do these things or pull off the road in a safe place to do them These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle e Judgment e Muscular Coordination e Vision e Attentiveness
197. easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures For V8 Engine Vehicles Only Look for two things e GM4718M RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS Your vehicle s engine requires a special oil HOT WEATHER meeting GM Standard GM4718M Oils meeting TT this standard may be identified as synthetic LOOK FOR However not all synthetic oils will meet this THIS SYMBOL FOR GM standard You should look for and use only ANDGM RGASOLNER an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M STANDARD SQENGINES Sg GM4718M Notice If you use oils that do not have the GM4718M Standard designation you can cause engine damage not covered by your warranty e SAE 5W 30 As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle He LM TER 10W 10 SRE SOH 0 These numbers on an oil container show its OIL NOT RECOMMENDED viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity COLD WEATHER oils such as SAE 20W 50 5 20 Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American You should look for this on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Petroleum Institute API Your vehicle s engine is filled at the factory with a Mobil 1 synthetic oil which meets all requirements for
198. easurement units that you choose will be reflected on all the vehicle system displays not just the DIC information For example the climate control panel will display degrees Celsius if you choose METRIC UNITS TCS Traction Control System You can enable or disable the traction control system using this menu item Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch between on and off You can also turn the traction control system off using the traction control button located near the shift lever When you disable the traction control system the traction control system warning light on the instrument panel cluster will come on See Traction Control System TCS Warning Light on page 3 40 for more information 3 56 D Clock Use this menu item to set the time on the vehicle s clock See Setting the Time on page 3 81 for more information i Clock Information Display Use this menu item to toggle between the clock display and the XM Information Song Artist Title if available See Setting the Time on page 3 81 and XM Satellite Radio Service under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information SETUP When you select this menu item the following submenu is available e LANGUAGE e PERSONALIZATION e CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS To change the language displayed on the radio select LANGUAGE by pressing the TUNE SEL knob Turn the TUNE SEL knob to scroll through the available languages and press the knob to make your selection
199. ect e If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object does not deform e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object The frontal airbags driver and right front passenger are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts Seat mounted side impact airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes Seat mounted side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts 1 57 Roof mounted side impact airbags are rollover capable and are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes or during a rollover Roof mounted side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or near frontal impacts or rear impacts A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design A side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the d
200. ed Notice The chime signals related to seat belts parking brake and other functions of your vehicle operate through the GM radio entertainment system If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to your vehicle the chimes may not work Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with your vehicle before installing it See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 23 for more information Setting the Time 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until SET CLOCK appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select SET CLOCK 4 Turn the TUNE SEL knob to adjust the time 5 Press the TUNE SEL knob to update the time VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear on the display If the CLOCK RADIO DISP is configured into one of the configurable keys pressing the key will switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time See Configurable Radio Display Keys under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information on configuring the keys 3 81 Radio with CD 3 82 Radio with CD shown Radio wit
201. ed Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 90 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display if the fuel cap is not reinstalled properly See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information A CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice f you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See
202. eeee ees 2 10 Driver Position Safety Belt ccceceeeeeeeeee eee es 1 16 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeeeeee 3 48 DIC Main Menu 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeee mensona 3 53 DIC Vehicle Personalization ceeeeeees 3 66 DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 57 Driver Information Center DIC cont Status of Vehicle Systems 3 49 System Controls s sccc s eee caciteeieieies 3 48 Driving AENDE 2 5cstiierancontecidtencthensteiassaeshtmmmescumens 4 30 Gity a E E 4 34 BON E E E E E E E 4 2 Dr nKeR seteriai e E ENNEA 4 3 Freeway aicsin sine esea GEUN EREE 4 35 Hill and Mountain Roads 0 0eeeeeeeee 4 37 In Rain and on Wet Roads eeeeeeenenen 4 32 inlor To ee 4 17 Recovery HOOK sisses ticc erniin ionia 4 44 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 44 WHER ce E E A 4 39 Dual Climate Control System 3 25 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 5 3 98 Electrical System Add On Equipment 0 ceeeseneeeeeeeeee es 5 96 Fuses and Circuit Breakers c eseeeeeeee 5 96 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 96 Rear Underseat Fuse Block 5 101 5 103 Underhood Fuse Block ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ee 5 97 Windshield Wiper Fuses eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 96 Engine Air Cleaner Filter cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen trees 5 24 Battery irana ted 5 42 Chec
203. eeee eres 3 98 Rear Seat Entertainment System 00005 3 98 Theft Deterrent Feature ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 111 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 2655 3 111 Radio Reception iissa minnanna 3 112 Care of Your CDs and DVDS eeeeeeee 3 113 Care of the CD and DVD Player 3 113 Diversity Antenna System e eeeeeeeeeee es 3 114 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 114 4 NOTES 3 3 The main components of the instrument panel are the following A Air Outlets See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 30 G Audio Navigation System See Audio System s B Turn Signal Multifunction Lever See Turn on page 3 80 Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 7 H Traction Control Button See Traction Control C Steering Wheel Controls See Audio Steering Wheel System TCS on page 4 9 Controls on page 3 111 Automatic Transmission Shift Lever See Automatic D Instrument Panel Cluster See nstrument Panel Transmission Operation on page 2 26 Cluster on page 3 34 J Climate Control System See Dual Climate Control E Windshield Wiper Lever See Windshield Wipers System on page 3 25 on page 3 9 K Glove Box See Glove Box on page 2 46 F Hazard Warning Flasher Button See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps
204. eeeeeeee eee eees 3 30 VIS OMS cis caaovasndetantanaumsaitnetasteateusan E TAA 2 17 13 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 33 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages e0eeeeee 3 57 Hazard Warning Flashers icce 3 6 Other Warning Devices eeeeeeeeeee teen ees 3 6 Safety and Symbols oireann nans iii Vehicle Damage ccisteicicncscoscancsaipeciduaspagetadchstids iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance 5 70 Different Size 0 cece eee e cece eee een eeaeeneea es 5 68 Replacement wiccocieviucresseccserenteaeetaentencsicaeter 5 70 Where to Put the Restraint cece eee 1 38 WVINGOWS a cte8 fh anere a E 2 14 POWER etana ea e A 2 15 Windshield Wiper Blades Cleaning sceeeeeeneeeeenes 5 91 Windshield Rear Washer Wiper ccce 3 11 14 Windshield Washer ceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee es 3 10 EN EE E A E E 5 38 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 51 FUSES ornes nina AEE EA PRE EAE 5 96 Windshield Wipers 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eres 3 9 Winter DIVING acccnaiesnamctacenseianticecwheneseateoncneecen 4 39 Wiper Activated Headlamps c ee 3 16 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 114 Your Vehicle and the Environment 00 6 2
205. eeeeeeees 1 35 Heated Seats siisicissieisesieersielcielevteeiions 1 4 Where to Put the Restraint cee 1 38 Reclining Seatbacks cceceeeeeeeeeneeeeen eee eenes 1 5 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Head Restraints c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 Children LATCH rrieta iiaa ania 1 39 Rear Seats nonnen ni 1 9 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Operation ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 9 Rear Seat Position a se 1 45 Stowabl Seat svsssacedcctotnteinrciactiies aedeed 1 9 Securing a Child Restraint in the Safety Belts iier 1 11 o RS FOE Seat POSION o gergi T9 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 1 11 Airbag System DOETE 1 50 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 15 Where Are the Airbags pii RNAn Eie an ERES 1 53 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 0 2 1 16 When Should an Airbag Inflate 1 57 Driver Position ccccccsseseecceeceeeeeseaaeeeeeees 1 16 What Makes an Airbag Inflate e 1 58 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy s s s 1 22 How Does an Airbag Restrain snssens11n 1 58 Right Front Passenger Position 00008 1 23 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 59 Rear Seat Passengers cccccessecseestesseeseen 1 23 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 61 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 00 1 26 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Safety Belt Pret
206. eeees 5 62 Tire Inspection and Rotation cee 5 65 When It Is Time for New Tires ccecce 5 66 Buying NOW TIES 0c scctt cei c saan stun omeesnwenninaines 5 66 5 1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 0006 5 68 Finish Care catace csteteaencent 2enttehitedinntectaniacineants 5 91 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeeeees 5 68 Windshield and Wiper Blades 0e 5 91 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 70 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 92 Wheel Replacement eeeeeeeneeeeeereeees 5 70 WIGS sects E S T 5 92 Tite Chains aseeseen ein ea E ieee 5 71 Sheet Metal Damage 6 ceeceeeeeeeee eee eeees 5 93 If a Tire Goes Flat cee ceeeeeeeneee eee eeeeeee ees 5 72 FINISH DAMAGE secacectiensts fied dees areara 5 93 Changing a Flat Tire cceeeeeeeeeee teeter eres 5 72 Underbody Maintenance cceeeeeeeeeee eee 5 93 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 74 Chemical Paint Spotting cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 93 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 94 the Spare Tire s eset eee eee 5 76 Vehicle Identification ccceeeeeeeeeetes 5 95 Secondary Latch System T E ET 5 81 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 00 020 5 95 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 83 Serv
207. een The headphones will shut off to save battery power if they lose the signal from the system after about four minutes The signal may be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones are out of range of the signal transmitters Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by your warranty Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place Battery Replacement To change the batteries do the following 1 Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door located on the left side of the headphone earpiece 2 Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Tighten the screws to close the compartment door If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Stereo RCA Jacks The RCA jacks are located on the front of the DVD player faceplate These jacks allow audio and video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system The left jack is for left audio input the right jack is for right audio input and the center jack is used for video input The system requires standard RCA cables not included to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper usage
208. ehicle has one If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 50 4 44 Recovery Hook Your vehicle may be equipped with a recovery hook The recovery hook is provided in the jack storage area The hook can be installed either at the front of the vehicle on the passenger side or at the rear of the vehicle on the driver side At either location remove the access cap from the vehicle trim and screw the hook into position You may need to use the hook if you are stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving A CAUTION The recovery hook when used is under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle The hook could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back Notice Never use the recovery hook to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear
209. em will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders on page 7 10 Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer for service Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are too close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape yellow coverings or yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag systems Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The airbag system does not need regular maintenance Adding Equipment to Your A
210. ements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your GM Goodwrench dealer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on the tire and loading information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving on page 4 17 e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 7 for further information A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should have your GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your service needs you will know that GM trained and s
211. enremiari ni 2 46 Fuel ccc ccinsesatnanees oe soatet eaaeijetcientamnncsenaiuacteteneacaece 5 5 AGOINVES a sedienta a EEEN E E 5 6 California Fuel ccccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 6 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 0 5 10 Filling Your Tank ceesre ee 5 8 Fuels in Foreign Countries eeeeeeneeeeeees 5 7 GAGE ceea an Se o A A ES 3 47 Gasoline Octane cceeeceee ia eee eee bi ninh 5 5 Gasoline Specifications ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees 5 6 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 96 Rear Underseat Fuse Block 5 101 5 103 Underhood Fuse Block ceeeeeeeeee eee ee ees 5 97 Windshield WIDer 2s cccascecsctwtecsenernedeteensentes 5 96 G Gage Engine Coolant Temperature eeeeee 3 41 T E ccs tasinamndtncanedlecidel eae dee citeebeanedlies 3 47 Speedometer cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 3 35 TACNOM CSRs cideissesnnancvexsneectaveaseacienteantaeeienex 3 36 Garage Door Opener assesseer einirurersnt renier 2 42 Gasoline Octane einan e e a ime ai 5 5 Specifications s c s0nc eae neden i eraki 5 6 GIOVE BOX sennecese a Aero E RA i 2 46 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 5 7 6 Hazard Warning Flashers seeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 3 6 Head Restraints saisdsdre nc ivtactiemctkceecticie ies 1 7 Headlamps ierices anan eE 3 16 Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 50 Daytime Running
212. ensioners cccccceccecccccececceeee 1 28 WOMICIG E adic E E E E E 1 61 Safety Belt Extender ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 28 Restraint System Check 0 eeeeeeeeee ee 1 62 Checking the Restraint Systems 08 1 62 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 1 63 1 1 Front Seats Power Seats Manual Passenger Seat If your vehicle has power seats the controls are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions Your vehicle may have a manual passenger seat To adjust the seat lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar Try to move the seat back and forth with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place 1 2 e Move the front of the horizontal control up or down to raise or lower the front part of the cushion e Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down to raise or lower the rear part of the cushion e Lift up or push down on the center of the horizontal control to move the seat cushion up or down e To move the seat forward or rearward slide the horizontal control forward or rearward The vertical control is used for reclining your seatback See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 5 for more information Power Lumbar Your vehicle may have this feature The driver s and passenger s seatback lumbar support can be adjusted by moving the c
213. er VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate If the radio is removed from your vehicle the original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the radio back to your vehicle With THEFTLOCK activated the radio will not operate if stolen Audio Steering Wheel Controls Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel They include the following M Mute Press this button to silence the system Press this button again or any other radio button to turn the sound on SRCE Source Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 if equipped radio or CD 3 111 Voice Recognition If your vehicle has the navigation system press this button to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information 1 6 Preset Stations Press this button to play stations that are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing press this button to go to the next track When a CD is playing in the six disc CD changer press this button to go to the next available CD if multiple CDs are loaded Volume Press this button to increase or to decrease the volume gt Seek Press either arrow to go to the next or the previous radio station and stay there The radio will only seek stations with a st
214. er s side front tire Remove the valve cap from the valve stem Activate the TPM sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire position To decrease the tire s air pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key Proceed to the passenger s side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 Proceed to the passenger s side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 Proceed to the driver s side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 10 After hearing the confirming double horn chirp for the left rear tire exit the matching process by turning the ignition switch to OFF 11 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the tire and loading information label 12 Put the valve caps back on the valve stems The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor If you replace one of the road tires with the spare the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed on the DIC screen This message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPM sensor The Service Tire Monitor message is also displayed when the TPM system is malfunctioning One or more missing or inoperable TPM sensors will cause the service tire monitor message to be displayed
215. er anchor attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 1 47 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 There is no top tether anchor in the right front passenger s position Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 if the child restraint has a top tether 1 48 Your vehicle has a right fr
216. er to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment e Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations e Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife This includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground e Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving e Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns e Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here is what we mean Tune your senses to different k
217. er vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the accident They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a GM dealer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time e Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays th
218. erformance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior accidents In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility
219. erhood Fuse Block on page 5 97 Battery See Battery on page 5 42 Passenger Compartment Air Filter See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 32 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 38 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 37 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 16 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 16 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 39 Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 29 and Cooling System on page 5 32 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24 Engine Oil Your vehicle may have an oil pressure light on the instrument cluster There is also an Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine message on the Driver Information Center DIC If the light and or message appears on the instrument cluster it means you need to check your engine oil level right away For more information see Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 and Oil Pressure Light on page 3 45 You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In
220. es flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your vehicle s hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 for more information When your vehicle has a flat tire use the following 5 example as a guide to assist you in the placement ZN CAUTION of wheel blocks Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle gt roni moving SEA Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in PARK P Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not The following information will tell you next how to use move you should put blocks at the front and the jack and change a tire rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle 5 73 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you will need is located in the rear of the vehicle To access the equipment do the following 1 Remove the storage bin to access the jack if your vehicle has the cargo mana
221. es of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 5 93 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Description Usage Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior Wax Treated polishing cloth Tar and Road Removes tar road oil Oil Remover and asphalt Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or and Polish stainless steel White Sidewall Removes soil and black Tire Cleaner marks from whitewalls Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl Removes dirt grime Glass Cleaner smoke and fingerprints Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on and wipe off Finish Enhancer 5 94 C Beseit Usage Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light surface contamination Removes light scratches Cleans shines and protects in one step No wiping necessary Swirl Remover Polish Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes Biodegradable and phosphate free Wash Wax Concentrate Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery Spot Lifter Odorless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics vinyl leather and carpet Odor Eliminator Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This is the legal identifier for your vehicle
222. eset 5 22 Your dealer has GM trained service people who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed After the oil has been changed the Change Engine Oil message and the oil life indicator must be reset How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System and the Oil Life Indicator The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Anytime your oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a Change Engine Oil Message in the DIC being turned on reset the system Base Audio System Press the CLR button located to the right of the DIC display to acknowledge the Change Engine Oil message This will clear the message from the display and reset it To reset the oil life indicator use the following steps 1 Press the up or down arrow on the INFO button located to the right of the DIC display to access the DIC menu 2 Once XXX ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is highlighted press and hold the CLR button The percentage will return to 100 and the oil life indicator will be reset 3 Turn the key to OFF If
223. eshold Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags which adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors which helps the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph 19 to 26 km h and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph 29 to 38 5 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving obj
224. ess the TUNE SEL knob once The message will appear on the screen See RDS Messages under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information AF Alternate Frequency This menu item allows you to turn the AF feature on and off To turn on AF press the TUNE SEL knob once When AF is on an X will be in the box next to AF on the menu The X disappears when AF is off See Activating Category CAT Stations RDS and XM under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for more information SEEK LOCAL DISTANT This feature instructs the audio system to seek only local radio stations with the strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with a strong signal in a large area Use LOCAL when you are in urban areas where there are several strong radio station signals and you want to limit the number of stations to those with the strongest signals only Use DISTANT when you are in rural areas where there are fewer radio station signals available To switch between LOCAL and DISTANT press the TUNE SEL knob Once your choice is displayed turn the knob to set your choice and continue scrolling through the main menu 3 55 uae English Metric Units Use this menu item to adjust the measurement units You can choose between ENGLISH UNITS and METRIC UNITS To switch between the two press the TUNE SEL knob Once your choice is displayed turn the knob to set your choice and continue scrolling through the main menu The m
225. essage will appear on the DIC whenever the ignition is on 3 18 Fog Lamps Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions The fog lamp controls are located on the turn signal multifunction lever 0 Fog Lamps The band with this symbol is used to turn the front fog lamps on and off The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work To turn the fog lamps on turn the fog lamp band on the lever up to the dot and release it The band will return to its original position To turn the fog lamps off turn the fog lamp band up to the dot and release it The band will return to its original position and the fog lamps will turn off If you turn on the high beam headlamps the fog lamps will also turn off They ll turn back on again when you switch back to low beam headlamps Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Exterior Lighting Battery Saver If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF This protects against draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on The battery saver does not work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition is turned to OFF If you need to leave the lamps on for more than 10 minutes use the exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on Instrument Panel Brightness The lever fo
226. et the message and indicator use one of the following procedures Base Audio System Press the CLR Clear button located to the right of the Driver Information Center DIC display to acknowledge the CHANGE TRANS FLUID message This will clear the message from the display and reset it To reset the transmission fluid life indicator use the following steps 1 Press the up or down arrow on the INFO Information button located to the right of the DIC display to access the DIC menu 2 Once the XXX TRANS FLUID LIFE menu item is highlighted press and hold the CLR button The percentage will return to 100 and the transmission fluid life indicator will be reset 3 Repeat the steps if the percentage does not return to 100 5 26 Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system see your navigation system supplement for instructions on how to reset the transmission fluid life indicator Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 29 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will e Give freezing protection do
227. f This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 105 for wheel spare you could damage the cover or the spare nut torque specification Notice Wheel covers will not fit on your compact spare If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact Do not try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare tire It will not fit Store the wheel cover securely Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid repaired or replaced expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification 5 80 Secondary Latch System Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system It is designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged For the secondary latch to work the tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 83 for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly A CAUTION Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions
228. f you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 5 39 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have your was brake system checked cn to see if there is a leak TA After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 40 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir A CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil i
229. fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you cannot try to slow down before you hit them Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning does not happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Driving Through Flowing Water A CAUTION Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive thr
230. feature will stop To reset the timer turn off the timer and then press and hold the CLR button The display will return to zero BATTERY VOLTS If you select this item the current battery voltage is displayed If the voltage is in the normal range the display will have OK after it For example the display may read 13 2 BATTERY VOLTS OK If there is a problem with the battery charging system there are four possible DIC messages that may be displayed See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information ENGINE OIL LIFE If you select this item the percentage of remaining oil life is displayed If you see 99 ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display that means that 99 of the current oil life remains When the oil life is depleted the Change Engine Oil message will appear on the display See your GM dealer for service In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Engine Oil on page 5 16 for more information When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by clearing it from the display you still must reset the engine oil life system separately For more information on resetting the engine oil life system see How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System and the Oil Life Indicator under Engine Oil Life System on page 5 22 If you clear the Change Engine Oil message from the display
231. finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs later in this section If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a soft marker instead Notice If you add any label to a CD insert more than one CD into the slot at a time or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs you could damage the CD player When using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on the display above the firm keys in place of the preset stations if programmed F1 PREV Previous Press this firm key to go to the previous track Press and hold this firm key to reverse quickly within a track Release the firm key to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display F2 NEXT Press this firm key to go to the next track Press and ho
232. first stop to close the sunroof to a desired position Press the front of the switch to the second stop to express close the sunroof Press the back of the front sunshade switch to open it Press it to the first stop to open the front sunshade to a desired position Press it again to express open the sunshade Press the front of the front sunshade switch to close it Press to the first stop to close it to a desired position Press the switch to the second stop to express close the front sunshade Press the back of the rear sunshade switch to open the rear sunshade Press the front of the switch to close the rear sunshade Anti Pinch Feature If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction The sunroof will then reverse To close the sunroof once it has re opened remove the obstruction and press the front of the sunroof switch Resynchronization To resynchronize the front sunroof and front and rear sunshades do the following 1 With the engine running press and hold the rear sunshade switch in the closed position for about 15 seconds the shade will move to the stop position 2 Momentarily release the button and press the rear sunshade switch in the closed position again The shade will now move to the fully open position and then return to the fully closed position Keep the switch pushed in the
233. flated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re under inflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Re check the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 5 61 High Speed Operation A CAUTION Driving at high speeds 100 mph 160 km h or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the
234. ft down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well On a long uphill grade shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph 70 km h to reduce the possibility of the engine and the transmission overheating Parking on Hills A CAUTION You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P When parking uphill turn your wheels away from the curb When parking downhill turn your wheels into the curb 2 Have someone place chocks behind the trailer wheels 3 When the chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes 4 59 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you e start your engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks 4 60 Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service m
235. ftgate The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing The remote keyless entry transmitter can be used to recall the memory settings for up to two drivers For more information see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 and Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 2 52 Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about four years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it is probably time to change the battery Notice When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter Use a flat thin object to
236. g the Road and Your Vehicle _ 4 2 TOWING sangirnir en REA 4 50 Service and Appearance Care c 00 5 1 DEVICE Satara tease tecoees ohne N 5 3 PUEI conerstentis teeer sanine tase Ea 5 5 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 5 10 All Wheel Drive ooo ccccccccc cscs eeeeeeaeeeaeaeaes 5 48 Rear Axle oriire ninaa ENE EA 5 49 FOnCAXIE orriren anoen EAN tenes 5 50 Bulb Replacement aa annannonnonnnnennnrnnnnnnnnenna 5 50 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 51 TINGS _ lvlcciecuedicncce E N merce ees 5 53 Appearance Care oo ee ececcecceeeneceeeeeeeeeneenes 5 87 Vehicle Identification oo ccc eeeeeee cece ences 5 95 Electrical System oo eec cece eee eee nese eee eens 5 96 Capacities and Specifications 5 105 Maintenance Schedule c0 cccscesseesseesseeeees 6 1 Maintenance Schedule c eceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 2 Customer Assistance and Information 7 1 Customer Assistance and Information _ 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects eee 7 14 WOOK issoke detec sceetcct ca pecedac cnet T 1 GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CADILLAC the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath and the name SRX are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes to the product after that time without notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute th
237. g rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the airbag Side impact airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including many frontal or near frontal collisions and rear impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those airbags Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags and only in moderate to severe side collisions for side impact airbags What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After frontal airbags and seat mounted side impact airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof mounted side impact airbags deflate more slowly and may still be at least partially inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest Some components of the airbag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s airbag the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag the side of the seatback closest to the door for the seat mounted side impact airbags and the area along the ceiling of your vehicle near the side windows may be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated a
238. g the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle 5 71 If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible 5 72 A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire If a tire go
239. gain more traction on slippery surfaces Parking Brake The parking brake pedal is located on the lower portion of the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal down with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster should come on If it does not you need to have your vehicle serviced See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 38 for more information 2 29 Shifting Into Park P A CAUTION P It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer To release the parking brake pull the release lever see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature To shift into PARK P use the following steps 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P by pressing the the parking brake i
240. ge transfer case fluid Additional Required Services cont d eae 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 41 500 83 000 125 000 166 000 207500 240 000 Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote I Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Maintenance Footnotes Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage transmission shift linkage and parking brake cable guides Ball joints should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 C or higher or they could be damaged a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine GM parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleani
241. gement system If your vehicle has the third row seat remove the head rest storage tray to access the jack 2 Turn the wing nut A holding the jack B and storage tray if applicable counterclockwise and remove it 3 Remove the jack and wheel wrench C 5 74 Removing the Spare Tire The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle ahead of the rear bumper See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 86 for more information about the compact spare To remove the spare tire from the vehicle do the following A Wheel Wrench B Cable C Retainer D Compact Spare Tire 1 Open the liftgate See Power Liftgate on page 2 12 for more information 2 Open the storage compartment door of the cargo management system that is nearest the liftgate and remove the container 3 Attach the wheel wrench A into the hoist shaft 4 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground Continue turning the wrench until the spare tire D can be pulled out from under the vehicle 5 Tilt the retainer C and slip it through the wheel opening to remove the spare tire from the cable B 6 Turn the wrench clockwise until you feel two slips or hear two clicks after removing the spare tire to raise the cable back up Do not store a full size or a flat road tire under the vehicle See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 83 To continue changing the flat tire see Removing the Flat Tire
242. ger station with the same category To turn AF on or off perform the following steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until ALTERNATE FREQ appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select AF OFF AF ON or AF REG An X will appear in the box when AF is selected on 4 Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out Radio Message THEFTLOCK This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has been activated Take the vehicle to the dealer for service XM Radio Messages Radio Display ses XL Explicit Language XL on the radio display These channels or any others can be blocked at a Channels after the channel name customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 indicates content with explicit language XM Updating Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and encryption code no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and after 4 second delay text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly
243. ges on page 3 57 for more information 5 28 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the surge tank but only when the engine is cool A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When replacing the pressure cap make sure it is hand tight and fully seated Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location Engine Overheating There are three engine hot messages that may be displayed in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information 5 29 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire
244. ght position pull up on the lever without applying pressure to the seatback Manual Recline Lever If your front passenger s seat has a manual reclining seatback the lever is located on the outboard side of the seat Lift the lever to release the seatback then move the seatback to where you want it Release the lever to lock the seatback in place Power Recliner If your vehicle has power reclining seatbacks the control is located on the outboard side of the front seats Press the top of the vertical control forward or rearward to adjust the seatback angle 1 6 Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Head Restraints A CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal The front seat head restraints can be adjusted up and down Pull up the head restraint to raise it Press the button located at the base of the head restraint and For proper protection when the vehicle is in push down on the restraint to lower it The front seat motion have the seatback upright Then si
245. h Six Disc CD similar Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS the radio can do the following e Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations e Seek to stations with traffic announcements This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While the radio is tuned to an RDS station the station name or call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada if available XM offers over 100 coast to coast channels including music news sports talk and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information including song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information cont
246. hair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users Call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Service Cadillac s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service It provides every Cadillac owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and where available a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on site service Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs Cadillac Roadside Service can be reached by dialing 1 800 882 1112 24 hours a day 365 days a year This service is provided at no charge for any situation covered by the base warranty coverage and ata nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by the base warranty Roadside Service is available only in the United States and Canada Cadillac Owner Privileges Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner Privileges at no charge throughout your Cadillac Warranty Period 48 months 50 000 miles 80 000 km Emergency Road Service is performed on si
247. hat temperature and it will not go into automatic mode In cold weather the system will start at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle until warmer air is available The system will start out blowing air at the floor but may change modes automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen temperature setting The length of time needed for warm up will depend on the outside temperature and the length of time that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven 3 Wait for the system to regulate This may take from 10 to 30 minutes Then adjust the temperature if necessary 3 25 You can switch from English to metric units through the Driver Information Center DIC If you have the Base audio system see DIC Main Menu on page 3 53 If you have the Navigation system see Setup Menu in the Navigation System Manual The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of the instrument panel near the windshield For more information on the solar sensor see Sensors later in this section Manual Operation VAAN Mode Pressing the mode switch and changing the mode cancels automatic operation and places the system in manual mode Press AUTO to return to automatic operation Th
248. he operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center 24 hours a day by calling 1 800 458 8006 In Canada contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre by calling 1 888 446 2000 We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Cadillac please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facil
249. heel nuts for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 72 for more information Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel Tire Chains Notice Use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class S type chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinnin
250. help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock
251. hen check to make sure you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call 911 for help Do not leave the scene of an accident until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the accident Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the accident This will help guard against post accident legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Service on page 7 6 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number drivers license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the oth
252. hey could be injured or killed Whether or not you are using rear park assist always check carefully behind your vehicle before you back up and then watch closely as you do 3 21 How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph 5 km h When the system turns on the three lights on the display will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let you know that the system is working If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE R at a speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h the red light will flash to remind you that the system does not work at a speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h If an object is detected at a REVERSE R speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h one of the following will occur Description English Metric Amber light Amber amber lights Amber amber red lights amp f Amber amber red lights flashing amp 1f 0 3 m continuous chime A chime will sound the first time an object is detected between 20 inches 0 5 m and 5 feet 1 5 m away URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object it must be within detection range behind the vehicle 3 22 When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly The light may flash red when the vehicle is in REVERSE R if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice an
253. hicle has the navigation option the direction the vehicle is facing will be displayed on the navigation screen cb On Off The on off button is located on the lower left side of the mirror and is used for the automatic dimming and compass functions of the rearview mirror 2 35 Mirror Operation The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the vehicle is started To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off press the on off button The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is on Compass Operation Press the on off button once to turn the compass on or off When the ignition and the compass feature are on the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds After two seconds the mirror will display the current compass direction Compass Calibration If after two seconds the display does not show a compass direction N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount note pad holder or similar object If the letter C appears in the compass window the compass may need to be reset or calibrated 2 36 The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction The compass can be calibrated by pressing and holding the on off button until a C is shown in the compass display Compass Variance Compass variance
254. hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill e Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places e Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping e Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers e Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path such as boulders trees logs or ruts e What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to find out e Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion 4 22 Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps e Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel e Geta smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Do not use more power than you need because you do not want your wheels to start spinning or sliding e Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route A CAUTION Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always
255. his message appears Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer immediately See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 37 for more information 3 62 Service Brake Assist This message will display when a problem with the panic brake assist system has been detected Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Service Charging System This message will display when a problem with the charging system has been detected Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Service Electrical System This message will display if an electrical problem has occurred within the Powertrain Control Module PCM or the ignition switch Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Service Fuel System The Powertrain Control Module PCM has detected a problem within the fuel system when this message appears Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Service Idle Control A problem with the idle control has occurred when this message displays Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Service Stability System This message will be displayed if there has been a problem detected with StabiliTrak If this message comes on while you are driving pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then back on If this message still stays on or comes back on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service Have the StabiliTrak system inspected by your GM dealer
256. his mode the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing The recirculation mode is cancelled when you enter defog mode If you select recirculation while in defog mode it will be cancelled after 10 minutes If you have fogging on the side windows turn the thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window defog position See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 30 for more information W Defrost Pressing defrost directs most of the air to the windshield with some air directed to the side windows In this mode the system will automatically turn off recirculation and run the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost mode This mode may also cause the fan speed and air temperature to increase If you have fogging on the side windows turn the thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window defog position See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 30 for more information Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear 3 29 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog or frost from the rear window The rear window defogger will only work when the ignition is in ON Gt Rear Window Defogger Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear window as p
257. how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors Your child restraint may have lower attachments and a top tether Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 1 39 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child lower attachments B restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor 1 40 Some top tether equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached In the United States some child restraints also have a top tether Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint
258. ial such as news talk shows sports broadcasts and books on tape Talk makes spoken words sound very clear 3 88 SPACIOUS This setting is used to make the listening space seem larger REAR SEAT This setting adjusts the audio to give the rear seat passenger s the best possible sound quality Sound quality for the front seat passengers may be different when this setting is used DRIVER SEAT This setting adjusts the audio to give the driver the best possible sound quality Sound quality for the front and rear seat passenger s may be different when this setting is used RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local and national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station ALERT will appear on the display You will hear the announcement even if the volume is low or a CD is playing If a CD is playing play will stop during the announcement Alert announcements cannot be turned off If the radio tunes to a related network station for the announcement it will return to the original station when the announcement is finished ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations MSG Message If the current RDS station has a message MSG will appear on the display The message may display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the entire message does not appear on the display parts of th
259. ice Parts Identification Label 0 00008 5 95 BOMIPAGE SP ANS TNS sapito opaite ae Electrical System ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee reas 5 96 Appearance Care 05 eee teeaeeeeneeeeees 5 87 Add On Electrical Equipment 0 0 ccccccceeeeee 5 96 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 5 87 Windshield Wiper Fuses ccccccceeeeeeeees 5 96 Fabric Carpet ccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 88 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 96 Leather eeeteseeeteeeeseeeeeseeesseseeessseestseseeeeseaes 5 89 Fuses and Circuit Breakers cccccccccecccceceeeee 5 96 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Underhood Fuse Block cscsessesesesessessees 5 97 Plastic SUMACES icine 5 89 Rear Underseat Fuse Block Wood Panels wees csceveeiccsciiaetisyectis vee comers 5 90 Driver Side so ccsincanccacdasacichdsacsdetnonstaaveneats 5 101 SPCAKE COVES ssisasciacerenreselacateadshatesieuaaateges 5 90 Rear Underseat Fuse Block Care of Safety Belts 0 ee 5 90 Passenger Side 0 ccccccseccceseceseseeeeseees 5 103 WeathOrstps tessccseincetanaiisecaxcseieaaaangetesennds 5 90 sa er Washing Your Vehicle o s 5 90 Capacities and Specifications 5 105 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 0008 5 91 5 2 Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service
260. im Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load range and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The load index can range from 1 to 279 The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Speed ratings range from A to Z 5 57 Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Inflation Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pre
261. in manone 5 66 California Fuel n ssics ccsicrnst hemeievenn cies antia 5 6 California Proposition 65 Warning ceeeeees 5 3 Canadian OQwnels is c icecce teivsiecsereesesetieeeied tice stcads ii Capacities and Specifications 006 5 105 Carbon Monoxide 058 2 12 2 33 4 39 4 52 Care of Safety Belts ccc ceeecee cece eeaeeeeeneeeeeaes 5 90 Your CD and DVD Player aiioa 3 113 Your CDs and DVDS herir aiaiisipiersr iieis 3 113 Cargo COVER iiisieteietAicohstinsspenwimsnanaiensamantentaacus 2 48 Cargo Management System ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 48 Cell Phone Storage Area cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 46 Center Console Storage Area cceeeeeeeeee ee 2 46 Chains Tire cccccceceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenes 5 71 Charging System Light eceeseeeeeeeneeeeenes 3 38 Check Engine Light wscsciccdenrek cused tnncuecceiaudaeencsaced 3 42 Checking Things Under the Hood 0 5 10 Chemical Paint Spotting ccceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 5 93 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems Infants and Young Children a se Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Older Children c cceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 0cceeeeeeeeeeeeees Where to Put the Restraint Cigarette Lighter
262. inds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you will need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds e You approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles e You have less time to react e You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles e You will need more distance for braking especially since you are on an unpaved surface A CAUTION When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you are driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts 4 20 Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the
263. ine a tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only G TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size P225 60R16 97S LETT B CDE F A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 60 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E R
264. ing Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You will save time and energy See Freeway Driving on page 4 35 Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway
265. ing brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only 5 92 Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes you could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original
266. installed on the vehicle Of course it s best to replace the spare with a full size tire as soon as you can The spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again 5 86 Notice When the compact spare is installed do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They will not fit Keep the spare tire and its wheel together Notice Tire chains will not fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Do not use tire chains on your compact spare Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Your vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from your upholstery It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible Your vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause Stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspa
267. ion control on off button located near the shift lever If the TC traction control warning light stays on or comes on while you are driving pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back on If the light still stays on or comes back on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service Have the traction control system inspected as soon as possible See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 for more information 3 40 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light tells you that your engine is very hot G Pra This light will come on when you first start the vehicle as a check to let you know that the light is working It will go out after a few seconds If the light does not come on the bulb may be burned out See your GM dealer to have it corrected If the light does not go out or if the light comes on and stays on while you are driving your vehicle may have a problem with the cooling system You should stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine A warning chime will sound when this light is on also See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area the engine is too hot That reading means the same thing as the warning light the engine coolant is ve
268. ion of the rear seat passengers Press this button again to restore normal operation of the DVD player This button may also be used to turn the DVD player power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is in an enabled power mode Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window above the video screen and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the function of the remote control Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight may damage it and the repairs will not be covered by your warranty Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place Remote Control Buttons b Power Press this button to turn the DVD player on and off 3 Illumination Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on for eight seconds Title Press this button to access the multiple titles if available of a DVD 3 105 Menu Press this button to access the DVD main menu E Display Press this button to switch the video screen display features color contrast brightness tint and display mode normal full and zoom Normal means the horizontal image i
269. ion when locking your vehicle This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by pressing the power lock switch a second time Power Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation Your vehicle has a power liftgate The vehicle must be in PARK P to power open or close the liftgate The liftgate must be completely closed to power open or the liftgate completely open to power close The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound at the beginning of each power operation cycle A CAUTION You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is closing Notice f you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door you could break the liftgate glass Always check to make sure the area above the liftgate is clear before opening To open and close the liftgate press and hold the power liftgate button on the remote keyless entry transmitter RKE until the liftgate starts moving Press the RKE button a second time during liftgate operations to reverse that operation See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2 5 for more information The liftgate can also be power closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation The power liftgate may be temporarily di
270. irbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything I might add to the front or sides of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly At Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end or side sheet metal or height they may keep the airbag system from working properly Also the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 1 61 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 1 62 Notice f you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s airbag
271. irbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle A CAUTION When an airbag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention 1 59 Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the airbags inflate if battery power is available You can lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the door lock and interior lamp controls The hazard warning flashers will also come on when the airbags deploy If you want to turn them off press the hazard warning flasher button twice In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag 1 60 Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for your airbag system If you do not get them the air bag syst
272. is feature to work and the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps or headlamps are on Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name 3 72 You can select this feature by itself or you can combine it with Horn Sounds At Lock so that both the lights flash and the horn chirps when you lock your vehicle The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Horn Sounds at Lock This feature sounds the horn once when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle All doors must be closed for this feature to work Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left
273. is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by the theft deterrent system at this time In an emergency contact Cadillac Roadside Service See Roadside Service on page 7 6 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines for the first 500 miles 805 km e Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow e Do not exceed 70 mph 113 km h Do not make full throttle starts also refrain from using the full throttle while driving Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle If these procedures are not followed your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this break in guideline every time you get new linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased 2 21 Ignition Positions With the key in the ignition switch you can turn the key to four different positions Notice If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can t turn it be sure you a
274. isplay To return 5 Turn the TUNE SEL knob to increase or to decrease to the original display repeatedly press the CLR the bass midrange or treble If a station is weak or button or wait for the display to time out noisy decrease the treble Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed 6 Press the TUNE SEL knob to set the adjustment for setting the preset firm keys for both home and away 7 Press the CLR button to exit the display 3 86 To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out AUDIO EQUALIZER This feature allows you to select customized equalization settings To choose an equalization setting EQO through EQS perform the following steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until EQUALIZER appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to set the equalization setting The equalization setting will appear on the display 4 Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out The equalization settings are preset to EQO Normal EQ1 Pop EQ2 Rock EQ3 Jazz EQ4 Talk and EQ5 Country Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade perform the following steps 1 2 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu Turn the TUNE SEL knob until BASS MID TREBLE appears on the disp
275. ission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Light A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil If equipped this light tells you if there could be a problem with your engine oil pressure The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or START It goes off once you start your engine That s a check to be sure the light works If it doesn t come on be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong When the light comes on and stays on it means that oil isn t flowing through your engine properly You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem Sport Mode Light This light will come on while the Driver Shift Control DSC feature is in use When you stop using the DSC feature the light will go out If it stays on your vehicle may need service See your dealer See
276. ity That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District
277. ization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until EXT LIGHT AT UNLOCK is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 3 73 Driver Unlock in Park The feature allows the driver s door to automatically unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If this feature is selected Driver Unlock Key Out Doors Unlock Key Out or Doors Unlock in Park cannot be selected 3 74 The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following
278. k and Service Engine Soon Light 3 42 COON sce E E E 5 26 Coolant Heater isdiorren 2 25 Coolant Temperature Gage eeeeeeeeeee ee 3 41 Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 40 Engine Compartment Overview s c e 5 12 EXMAUSD tiscccatdssnedareh secure raie a ai 2 33 Oil Hise tatieetoeadusdaieels sei ciest E ase 5 16 Oil Life System 00 0 cece eee nee eee eee eeeeeee eens 5 22 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5 31 OVErMEATIAG sics ocana aa LEE EE ERES 5 29 Speed Limiter u odes erchewecieetnas aeieneaeceneene 3 36 Starting eraon erea ee aE Aedes 2 24 Entry CJAN seccvt tions sesaterennmecicenadnccaestieaetaote 3 19 Event Data Recorders EDR iecere 7 10 Extender Safety Belt cccceceeeeeeeeeee teen ees 1 28 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver eeeeeeeees 3 19 Filter Engine Air Cleaner a se 5 24 Finish Damage searre ntoy cee ea 5 93 Flash to Pass neinna a n 3 9 Rat Wire enea scene easadesemeneecteme 5 72 Flat Tire Changing ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 5 72 Flat Tire Storing s 22 lt s2e 5 ssseesccioideersceeeiedia ayers 5 83 Fluid Automatic Transmission ceecee 5 25 Power Steering cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeen ees 5 37 Windshield Washer ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeen tees 5 38 Fog Lamp EG hts c4ctesd versie tinea ee et 3 46 FOO LAMPS ior mie aneri aek men aien 3 18 Front Axle enaren ara E aa 5 50 Front Storage Area sienslericn
279. kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider e Is the path ahead clear e Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead e Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There is more discussion of these subjects later e Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you are not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what is not Drinking and driving
280. know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck but you must use caution A CAUTION If you let your tires spin at high speed they can exp
281. l across North America They will be ready and willing to help if you need it 4 36 Here are some things you can check before a trip e Windshield Washer Fluid s the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades Are they in good shape e Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels e Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean e Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure e Weather Forecasts What is the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system e Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Do not let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips e Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior
282. l level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 16 for further details Notice Itis important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to your engine not covered by your warranty Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 26 for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire See Tires on page 5 53 for further details Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 72 At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check Starter Switch Check A CAUTION A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked
283. lated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 5 69 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment may need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced See your dealer for proper diagnosis 5 70 Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will Know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and w
284. lay Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the tone settings Press the TUNE SEL knob to scroll to BALANCE or FADER Turn the TUNE SEL knob to adjust the BALANCE to the right or the left speakers and the FADER to the front or the rear speakers Press the TUNE SEL knob to set the adjustment Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out EQO will not appear on the display when in this mode 3 87 Using DSP Available only with the premium Bose audio system this feature is used to provide a choice of five different listening experiences DSP normal talk spacious rear seat and driver seat DSP can be used while listening to the radio or the CD player The radio keeps separate DSP settings for each band preset and source To select a DSP choice perform the following steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until one of the five settings appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select a DSP setting 4 Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out DSP NORMAL This setting provides the best overall audio performance for all passengers DSP NORMAL will not appear on the display when in this mode TALK This setting should be used when listening to non musical mater
285. ld restraint instructions will show you how 1 43 5 If the child restraint is forward facing attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 5 1 Find the top tether anchor 5 2 If you have an adjustable head restraint raise the head restraint 5 3 Route and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback 1 44 If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 There are no top tether anchors in the third row seating positions Do not secure a
286. ld this firm key to advance quickly within a track Release the firm key to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display 3 93 F3 RDM Random Press this firm key to listen to the tracks in random rather than sequential order RANDOM will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn off random play RANDOM will disappear from the display F4 RPT Repeat Press this firm key to hear a track over again REPEAT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn off repeat play REPEAT will disappear from the display F6 DISP Display Press this firm key to display the time of the track Press this firm key again to remove the time of the track from the display A SEEK V Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous track on the CD A SCAN V Press this button to listen to each track for 10 seconds The CD will go to a track play for 10 seconds then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning A Eject Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing Eject may be activated with the ignition and the radio off 3 94 Using the Six Disc CD Changer The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality
287. le or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and e Have your vehicle fixed immediately Running the Engine While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know A CAUTION Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 2 33 Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Winter Driving on page 4 39 2 34 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move
288. le warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by warranty Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain your vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replac
289. leage for that trip odometer will return to zero Each trip odometer must be reset individually 3 35 Tachometer This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Engine Speed Limiter This feature prevents the engine from operating at too many revolutions per minute rpm When the engine s rpms are too high the throttle is closed to reduce speed If this is not sufficient then the fuel supply to the engine will be limited When the rpms return to normal the fuel supply will return to normal This helps prevent damage to the engine 3 36 Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to ON or START a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more IA If the driver s belt is already buckled the chime will not come on Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensors the airbag modules the wiring and the diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 50 This light will come on when you start y
290. left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If this feature is selected Doors Unlock Key Out Driver Unlock Key Out or Driver Unlock in Park cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 3 75 Doors Unlock Key Out This feature allows the doors to automatically unlock when the key is removed from the ignition Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until DOORS UNLOCK KEY OUT is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name 3
291. liftgate to the fully closed and latched position The liftgate will now resume normal power operation Your vehicle has a pinch sensor located on the rear edge of the rear quarter panel windows If an object is caught between the liftgate and the window and presses against this sensor the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually Manual Liftgate Operation With the doors unlocked the power liftgate can always be manually opened and closed To open the liftgate pull up on the handle on the outside of the liftgate To close the liftgate use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close The liftgate latch will power cinch to closed position Always close the liftgate before driving A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can not see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate e Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle See Dual Climate Control System on page 3 25 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way Se
292. llite Radio Antenna System 3 114 Anti Lock Brake System ABS eeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 7 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 3 39 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 92 Care of Safety Belts ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 90 Chemical Paint Spotting ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 5 93 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 0 08 5 91 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 5 87 Fabric Carpet cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 88 Finish Cafeer sirisser e sett 5 91 Finish Damage siticstesecs wceastecqteaewocdusieaecsdenece 5 93 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUMACES siveigesdednacied Meabidbeardditeanedencecsasnee 5 89 Leather creeren onea a aeee 5 89 Sheet Metal Damage ceeeeeeeeeeeeee tees 5 93 Speaker Covers ccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeees 5 90 TOS sc ccnchaciicoicittanininieewceueiasstaptgehasaaiebesdendensa 5 92 Underbody Maintenance eeeeeeeee eee es 5 93 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 94 Washing Your Vehicle seeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 90 Weathersttips ccccicccisiciescieastansctaasageteeneasscenans 5 90 Windshield and Wiper Blades 0000 5 91 Wood Panels saicciecdentyirdid ilecves ess deaceuaden scans 5 90 Ashtray S stpneuttncndresteccenatendbesadartoneoiencnetaceas 3 24 Audio System S searen i Aian iaaa 3 80 Audio Steering Wheel Controls
293. lls you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a Safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3 36 In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here is why They work hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and some
294. lode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you are stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer Notice Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For more information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 71 4 43 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak System turn the system off by pressing and holding the Traction button so that the STABILITY SYS DISABLED message and the traction off light are illuminated on the instrument panel cluster Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that does not get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery hook if your v
295. lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this e Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2 5 e If you are still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry System Operation With this feature you can lock and unlock the doors or the liftgate and turn on your vehicle s interior lamps from about 10 feet 3 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle lw y You can program your vehicle so that the exterior lamps will flash and or the horn will sound when you lock the doors with
296. lt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace the driver s and right front passenger s safety belt buckle assembly Be sure to do so Then the new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision After a crash you may need to replace the driver and front passenger s safety belt buckle assemblies even if the frontal airbags have not deployed The driver and front passenger s safety belt buckle assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a collision or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 37 1 63 4 NOTES 1 64 Section 2 Features and Controls ROY S carena a a 2 3 Starting the Engine ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 24 Remote Keyless Entry System 0 000e 2 4 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 24 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation 2 5 Engine Coolant Heater eceeeeeeeeeees 2 25 Doors and LOCKS cccccececcccceeeeeeeeaeaeeeees 2 8 Automatic Transmissi
297. ly trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels 2 43 If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 6 Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8 8 Return to the vehicle Firmly press and hold the programmed Universal Home Remote button for two seconds then release Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming The Universal Home Remote should now activate your rolling code equippe
298. m of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring Check with your dealer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving on Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shi
299. may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT General Motors recommends against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to your fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if y
300. ments are true e You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire e You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric e The tire has a bump bulge or split e The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 5 66 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall by the tire manufacturer If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewaill Labelling on page 5 54 for additional information Winter
301. milar 3 34 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer lets you see your speed in either miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada If your vehicle has to have a new odometer installed the new one may read the correct mileage This is because your vehicle s computer has stored the mileage in memory While the Driver Shift Control DSC feature is active the odometer will change to show the gear range See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 26 for more information Trip Odometers The trip odometer can record the number of miles or kilometers traveled for up to two trips The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information Center DIC To access the trip odometer use one of the following procedures Using the Base audio system do the following 1 Press the INFO Information button located to the right of the screen to access the DIC menu 2 Scroll through the menu using the up or down arrows on the INFO button until you reach Trip Odometer A or Trip Odometer B The selected trip odometer A or B will be displayed at the top of the screen with the accumulated mileage 3 Repeat the steps to view the other trip odometer You can reset the selected trip odometer by pressing CLR Clear button located in the center of the INFO button to the right of the screen The mi
302. more information on location 5 24 When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 83 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required To inspect or replace the filter do the following 1 Remove the two screws located on the top of the cover 2 Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that it is not going across the top of the engine air cleaner filter 3 Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from the passenger s side of the engine air cleaner filter 4 The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the bottom Open the airbox by pushing the top of the airbox cover toward the engine 5 Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through the opening in the airbox 6 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 for the correct part number for the filter 7 Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4 A CAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off
303. mum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load 5 55 5 OXXXXX GSS Rs Mizz Noyan gt G S 3 gt 2 a 8 z7 Compact Spare Tire Example A Temporary Use Only The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3 000 miles 5 000 km and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph 105 km h The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat If your vehicle has a compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 5 86 and f a Tire Goes Flat on page 5 72 5 56 B Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread C Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following the DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture D Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load E Tire Inflation The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 F Tire Size A combination of letters and numbers def
304. n The window will rise for as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released the express mode is re activated In this mode the window can still close on an object in its path Use care when using the override mode Window Lockout This feature allows you to disable the passenger window switches The passenger window lockout button is located below the power window switches on the drivers door armrest Press the button to disable the passenger window controls The light on the button will illuminate indicating that the feature is in use The passenger windows still can be raised or lowered using the drivers window switches when the lockout feature is active To restore power to the passenger windows press the button again The light on the button will go out You can program this feature to disable all passenger windows or only the rear passenger windows See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 for more information Sun Visors Swing down the primary visor to block out glare It can also be detached from the center mount and moved to the side to block glare from that direction The driver s sunshade may also have buttons for a built in garage door opener See Universal Home Remote System on page 2 42 for more information Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the visor down and lift the cover The light will automatically come on The light will go out when you close the cover Theft Deterrent System
305. n cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed Always keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive avoid engaging in extended searching while driving 3 80 Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe driving For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Get familiar with your vehicle s audio system so you can use it with less effort and take full advantage of its features Here are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction while driving While your vehicle is parked e Familiarize yourself with all of its controls e Familiarize yourself with its operation e Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if equipped Notice Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle such as an audio system CD player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units If sound equipment can be added it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been add
306. n slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the cruise control back on 3 13 Setting Cruise Control This light on the y instrument panel cluster will come on while Z CAUTION cruise control is on If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Resuming a Set Speed Keep the cruise control switch off until you Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired want to use cruise control speed and then you apply the brake This of course disengages the cruise control But you don t need to reset it 1 Move the cruise control switch to on 6 bout 25 mph 40 km h nce you re going about 25 mp m h or more 2 Get up to the speed you want you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on 3 Press in the set button at the end of the lever to resume accelerate and release it You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
307. n steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off 3 43 Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you p
308. n your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid e If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 90 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly A CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel
309. ndard may be identified as synthetic and should also be identified with the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol However not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GM standard You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle For the proper viscosity see Engine Oil on page 5 16 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 5 26 Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or Brake System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid Usage Fluid Lubricant g GM Optikleen Washer Solvent Power GM Power Steering Fluid Steering GM Part No U S 89021184 System in Canada 89021186 DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Fluid Look for Approved for the H Specification on the label Automatic Transmission Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 12378261 in Canada 10953455 meeting GM Specification 9986115 DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Transfer Case Fluid Look for Approved for the H Specification on the label Key Lock Cylinders Chassis Lubrication Fr
310. ne and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot The upper radiator hose is the largest of the hoses which comes out of the radiator on the passenger s side of the vehicle Watch out for the engine cooling fans By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated Start the engine and allow it to warm up If the Check Coolant Level message does not appear on the Driver Information Center the coolant is at the proper fill level If a Check Coolant Level message does appear repeat Steps 1 to 3 then reinstall the pressure cap or see your GM dealer 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to slightly above the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank 5 36 Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid
311. needs You will get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACVelco E parts GM Goodwrench E Accessories Accessories and Modifications When you add non GM accessories to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle s performance and safety including such things as braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories may even cause malfunction or damage not covered by warranty GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on your vehicle Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals Doing Your Own Service Work A CAUTION You can be injured and your vehicle could be
312. ng the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assemblies secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl hood hinges body door hinges rear compartment hinges and any folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak See Weatherstrips on page 5 90 g A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions
313. ns clearly The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty If static is heard on the radio when the rear window defogger is turned on it could mean that a defogger grid line has been damaged If this is true the grid line must be repaired 3 114 If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass make sure that the grid lines for the AM FM antennas are not damaged Make sure the cellular telephone antenna does not touch a grid line XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception If your vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the XM system Make sure the XM Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed Section 4 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 2 Defensive Driving ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Drunken Driving isinsin reine senna aaben innia 4 3 Control of a Vehicle eceeeeeeeeeeeeeneee een eees 4 5 Braking eonen E E EEN 4 6 Anti Lock Brake System ABS o c 4 7 Braking in Emergencies ascneaenssernrerrrernnnnns 4 8 Traction Control System TCS a e 4 9 Magnetic Ride Control eeeseeeeeeeeeeereren 4 10 Limited Slip Re
314. ns of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inf
315. nsmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped REVERSE R Use this gear to back up At low vehicle speeds you can also use REVERSE R to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 43 for additional information NEUTRAL N In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only You can also use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle 2 27 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down
316. nstrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 5 95 Gasoline Octane If your vehicle has the 3 6L V6 engine VIN Code 7 use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher For best performance or trailer towing you may choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline If the octane rating is less than 87 you may notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service If your vehicle has the 4 6L V8 engine VIN Code A use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher You may also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher but your vehicle s acceleration may be slightly reduced and you may notice a slight audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock If the octane is less than 87 you may notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you might damage your engine If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 in Canada Some gasolines
317. nt Parts 6 14 Owner Checks and Services ccceeeeeeeees 6 9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance cccce cece eeeeees 6 4 Maintenance Schedule cont USINO za aae ae E 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Light seeen 3 42 Manual Passenger Seat eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 1 2 Memory Mirrors 0 cceceeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 52 Memory Seat cccececceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeaeeneees 2 52 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 57 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar 2 35 Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar and COMPASS oone nenie aisi a annaa a 2 35 MGMONY sirpis anina ene eonna a OE EEE 2 52 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 39 Outside Convex Mirror ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 39 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror 00 08 2 39 Outside Power Heated Mirrors 0 00008 2 38 MY GMEINK COM erai araa aama eE 7 4 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual aa a nes 3 98 New Vehicle Break In nosesnessesnesessreresrereenne 2 21 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 OdOMetel errre E EEEE A EEEE 3 35 Odometers TP seiniin anenai esa E EES apaa 3 35 Off Road DIVING scssi iriiria oanrin 4 17 Off Road RECOVENY 2s sireectie ceed eniiiesietdye 4 14 Oil ENGINE aerea getl
318. o jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake Notice If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio ath lt n NK D L y Dy DM A TOE Open the hoods and locate the positive and negative terminal locations of the other vehicle as well as the positive terminal location on your vehicle s battery See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on the location of the battery 5 43
319. o not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you are being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal Remember Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid If your traction control system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foo
320. o use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid e Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full e Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the reservoir DOT 3 AR There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well or will not work at all So it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION I
321. o work Before reprogramming you will need to replace or recharge your vehicle s battery To program each front window follow these steps 1 With the ignition in ACCESSORY ON or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active close all doors 2 Press and hold the down arrow on the power window switch until the window has fully opened 3 Press the up arrow on the power window switch until the window is fully closed 4 Continue holding the up arrow on the switch for approximately two seconds after the window is completely closed The window is now reprogrammed Repeat the process for the other front window Express Window Anti Pinch Feature If any object is in the path of the window when the express up is active the window will stop at the obstruction and auto reverse to a preset factory position Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause the window to auto reverse The window will return to normal operation once the obstruction or condition is removed A CAUTION If express override is activated the window will not reverse automatically You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged Before you use express override make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path Express Window Anti Pinch Override In an emergency the express window anti pinch feature can be overridden in a supervised mode Hold the window switch all the way down in the express positio
322. o work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you do not your engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty 2 24 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal If your vehicle is equipped with this feature you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals The vehicle must be in PARK P for this feature to operate The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the side of the steering column ay Move the switch rearward to move the pedals closer to your body Move the switch forward to move the pedals away from your body Engine Coolant Heater Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant heater In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0 F 18 C as noted on the cord To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine
323. of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Online Owner Center The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs Specific vehicle information can be found in one place The Online Owner Center allows you to e Get e mail service reminders e Access information about your specific vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner s manual United States only e Keep track of your vehicle s service history and maintenance schedule e Find GM dealers for service nationwide e Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members United States only Refer to the web for updated information To register your vehicle visit www MyGMLink com United States or My GM Canada within www gmcanada com Canada Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing 1 800 833 CMCC 2622 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Cadillac the letter sho
324. of the engine oil has expired and it should be changed and that your vehicle is due for service See your GM dealer See Engine Oil on page 5 16 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by clearing it from the display you still must reset the engine oil life system separately For more information on resetting the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 22 If you clear this message from the display it will not re appear Change Trans Transmission Fluid This message indicates that the life of the transmission fluid has expired and it should be changed See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for the proper fluid and change intervals When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message by clearing it from the display you still must reset the transmission fluid life monitor separately For more information on resetting the transmission fluid life monitor see Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 25 Check Brake Fluid This message will display if the ignition is in ON to inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low Have the brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 38 and Brakes on page 5 39 for more information Check Coolant Level Notice If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be
325. ol systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down If you have StabiliTrak you may see the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the message center See Stability System Active Message under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between
326. ollowing steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select ON or OFF An X will appear in the box when TA is selected on 4 Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out 3 89 Activating Category CAT Stations RDS and XM CAT allows you to search for stations with specific types of music The selectable categories are POP EASY TALK CNTRY Country CLASS Classical and JAZZ To activate program types perform the following steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until CATEGORY appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select ON or OFF An X will appear in the box when CAT is selected on 4 Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out Once CAT is activated the categories will appear on the display above the firm keys in place of the preset stations if programmed Press the firm key for the category that you would like to listen to Not all stations support CAT The radio may not go to all of the stations with that music type when pressing the firm key 3 90 AF Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stron
327. omers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds A Accessories and Modifications eeeeee 5 3 Accessory Power Outlet S eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 23 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped VENICE ae orea a tenderer actrees vs 1 61 Additives Fuel ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeetenees 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment seceeeseeeceeee 5 96 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 24 Air Cleaner Filter Engine cceeeeeeeeeeneeees 5 24 Air Conditioning cccccsncosseeh cited hie ase 3 25 Airbag Readiness Light cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 3 37 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM 7 10 Airbag System cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 50 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped V RGE ssicscnavineactecaceassteaenamansiyecenentect seen 1 61 How Does an Airbag Restrain eeeee 1 58 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 61 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 1 58 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 59 When Should an Airbag Inflate 0 1 57 Where Are the Airbags ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 53 All Witeel Drive icc 2 sc ctccs tenccetaaiacitentnceaintentebsbecss 5 48 All Wheel Drive AWD System ceeeeeeee ees 4 12 Antenna Diversity Antenna System 3 114 Antenna XM Sate
328. on Operation 2 26 Central Door Unlocking System 0 0 ccccceeeeeee 2 9 Parking Brake saarose ieri ai e A 2 29 Power Door LOCKS 00ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeees 2 9 Shifting Into Park P ccceeseeeeteteetee 2 30 Delayed LOGKING i srren EES 2 9 Shifting Out of Park P 2 32 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 10 Parking Over Things That Burn s0 2 33 Rear Door Security LOCKS c cccccseceseeeeeesees 2 10 Engine Exhaust teeter esirrerreerererirenrtnerenereret 2 33 Lockout Protection cccccceecceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 Running the Engine While Parked 2 34 Power LING AIG esirdin aa 2 12 MINO S ianea pa 2 35 WINdOWS sierici ene ens a TEEN 2 14 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Power Windows 0cccccccseeceeeceeseceeeaeees 2 15 with OnStar ae a assem 2 35 SUM VISOTS acien paei 2 17 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror heft D S 2 18 with OnStar and Compass 0 0cecceeees 2 35 Theft Deterrent Systems isiisss iist ce atncnentarese Outside Power Heated Mirrors 00seeee 2 38 Theft Deterrent System 1 0 2 1 ester oa Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 39 ee a neta SOE EEE EEE a Outside Curb View Assist Mirror 2 2 39 Immobilizer Operation ses errs z Outside Convex Mirror ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 39 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 2
329. on a level around the vehicle surface 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake brake See Parking Brake on page 2 29 on page 2 29 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if turn off the engine immediately if it starts the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON but do should start only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N not start the engine Without applying the regular If the vehicle starts in any other position contact brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P your GM Goodwrench dealer for service with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position e The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift lever is in PARK P e The key should come out only in OFF Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park P Mechanism Check A CAUTION When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply th
330. on page 3 46 for additional information Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come on when the following conditions are met e Itis still daylight and the ignition is in ON or START e the exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO with the headlamps off and e an automatic transmission is not in PARK P or the parking brake is not set on a manual transmission When DRL are on only your front turn signal lamps will be on No other exterior lamps will be on when the DRL are being used Your instrument panel won t be lit up either When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it s dark enough outside the DRL will turn off and the low beam headlamps will turn on When it s bright enough outside the low beam headlamps will go off and the DRL will turn back on If you start your vehicle in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once you leave the garage it will take about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright a
331. once all the doors are closed again You can press the door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter again to override this feature and lock the doors immediately You can turn this feature off using the Driver Information Center DIC When delayed locking is off the doors will lock immediately when you press the power door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 for more information Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are closed the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out of PARK P all the doors will lock The front door inside handles will remain active The doors will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move the shift lever back into PARK P If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are locked have that person use the manual lever or power door lock switch for the rear doors The front doors will remain unlocked from inside the vehicle When the door is closed again it will not lock automatically Use the manual lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door The power door locks can be programmed through prompts displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC These prompts allow you to choose various lock and unlock settings For more information on programming see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 66 Rear Door Security
332. ont seats Slide the cover back to expose them There are also cupholders in the armrest of the second row seat Press the panel on the front of the armrest to expose the cupholders On the outboard sides of the third row there may also be cupholders 2 46 Cell Phone Storage Area Your vehicle has a closeable cell phone sunglasses storage area inside both of the front doors Press the button to open the door Front Storage Area Your vehicle has a closeable storage area inside both of the front doors Press the button to open the door Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle has a center console storage area located between the front seats It includes storage areas and accessory power outlet s on the rear of the console Luggage Carrier A CAUTION If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood a mattress and so forth the wind can catch it as you drive along This can cause you to lose control What you are carrying could be violently torn off and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision and of course damage your vehicle You may be able to carry something like this inside But never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle If your vehicle has a luggage carrier you can load things on top of your vehicle The luggage carrier has side rails attached to the roof You
333. ont and Rear Axle Usage Fluid Lubricant Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Hood Hinges GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Body Door Hinge Pins Tailgate Hinge Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube and Linkage GM Part No U S 12346241 Folding Seats in Canada 10953474 and Fuel Door Hinge Outer Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Handle Pivot GM Part No U S 12346241 Points in Canada 10953474 Dielectric Silicone Grease Weatherstrib GM Part No U S 12345579 9 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease with Teflon hela Superlube GM Part No q U S 12371287 in Canada 10953437 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer pt amare numbers Amber Driver s Side 22 inches 56 5 cm Rear Wiper Blade 13 inches 33 0cm 25759094 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or T Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance I
334. ont passenger s airbag Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here is why A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger s airbag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Power Seats on page 1 2 or Manual Passenger Seat on page 1 2 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 5 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 4 Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed 1 49 6 To
335. ont seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 38 for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual A CAUTION Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the vehicle is designed to hold only one child restraint Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per anchor Find the lower anchors if equipped for the desired seating position If the desired seating position does not have lower anchors see Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position on page 1 45 for instructions on installing the child restraint using the safety belts Put the child restraint on the seat 4 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors if equipped in the vehicle The chi
336. ontacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing e Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time e Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces yo
337. ontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from home why should wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you are in an accident even one that is not your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see Older Children on page 1 28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 31 Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you will want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We will start with the driver position 1 16 Driver Position Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here is how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so y
338. ontal position on the floor in the rear of the vehicle 3 Route the tie down strap through the tire as shown in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo tie downs in the rear of the vehicle 4 Tighten the tie down strap 5 84 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools A CAUTION The underbody mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing down If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing upwards its secondary latch won t work properly and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall from your vehicle If this happened when your vehicle was being driven the tire might contact a person or another vehicle causing injury and of course damage to itself as well Be sure the underbody mounted spare tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down To store the spare tire and tools do the following 1 Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle Position the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is pointed down facing the rear of the vehicle 2 Lower the cable to the ground See Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 74 Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through the center hole of the spare tire Makesure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel Attach the wheel wrench to the hoist shaft Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to lift the spare tire When the tire is almost in the stored position turn the tire so
339. ontrol 2 0 00 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 3 12 Cruise Control Light crescissi iiie eicsri canes 3 46 CUPNOIJET S sisiane mrn adonan Sea eiA 2 46 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation c cceeeeeneeeeeneee ees 7 8 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users asasen 7 4 Customer Assistance Offices ceeeeeeeees 7 4 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 06 7 2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 6 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 7 15 Customer Assistance Information cont Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian GOVEIMNMENE s caxehe etesectaiewerdasiedeesdenaiedenns 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 7 14 Roadside Service ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 7 6 Service Publications Ordering Information 7 15 Daytime Running Lamps cceeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 17 Defensive Driving ceeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Delayed Locking sicitisteelekt ites ne aN 2 9 Diversity Antenna System cceeeeeeeeeneee renee 3 114 Doing Your Own Service Work eceeeeeee ees 5 4 Door Central Door Unlocking System ee 2 9 Delayed Locking 2s2iviauieeet niea E nasties 2 9 EOGKS oE EE 2 8 Power Door Locks sissioni iiaae 2 9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS e eeeeeee
340. ontrol located on the outboard side of the seat cushions To increase or decrease support hold the control forward or rearward Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support Adjust the seat as needed Heated Seats If your vehicle is equipped with heated front seats the buttons are located on the climate control panel A There is one button for the driver and one for the front passenger Each button has three settings LO HI and off The active setting appears on the climate control panel display The LO setting warms the seatback and cushion until the seat approximates normal body temperature The HI setting has a slightly higher temperature To turn on the heated seats press the button once The seat will heat to the HI setting Press the button again to switch to the LO setting Pressing the button a third time turns the system off The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is turned on When the vehicle is turned off the heated seats automatically turn off If you wish to have the heated seats on once the vehicle is restarted press the button again Reclining Seatbacks A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked To return the seatback to the upri
341. or gate operator you are programming When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Programming Universal Home Remote Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Press and hold down the two outside Universal Home Remote buttons releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the desired Universal Home Remote button and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section 4 The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons 5 Press and hold the new
342. ore often when you re pulling a trailer See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant drive belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE sne a e E Ei 5 3 Accessories and Modifications cceeceee 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 008 5 3 Doing Your Own Service Work 0seeeeeee eee 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside Ob YOUR VGNICIG ss catencaut piane ad a 5 5 Fuel iriri east EE EATA E A 5 5 Gasoline Octane ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeee 5 5 Gasoline Specifications cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee 5 6 California F el irespeto eiie 5 6 POGIIVES erpi pennon ani oa EE Oii E 5 6 Fuels in Foreign Countries 0 esceeeeeeneeeeeees 5 7 Filling the Tank cccsccssscccesactatsenceeeddtandsessiaanentaas 5 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 005 5 10 Checking Things Under th
343. ormation and details about the DIC operation and displays see System Controls on page 3 48 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPM system will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message on the DIC and at the same time illuminate the low tire pressure warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label When the low tire pressure telltale is illuminated one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The Tire and Loading Information Label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and their recommended cold inflation pressures See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 for the location of the tire and loading information label Also see nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 60 Your vehicle s TPM system can alert you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspec
344. ossible The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes after the button is pressed Or if the vehicle s speed is above 30 mph 48 km h the rear defogger will stay on continuously If turned on again the defogger will only run for about five minutes before turning off The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defogger button is on Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty 3 30 Outlet Adjustment Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet to change the direction of the airflow Use the thumbwheels to open or close the outlets my Side Window Defog Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to use the side window defog setting The air coming through the outlets will be directed toward the side windows to clear fog S Open Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to open the outlets completely and allow the maximum amount of air to enter your vehicle A small amount of air will still be directed to the side windows XI Closed Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to close the outlets and minimize the amount of air entering the vehicle
345. ou can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 28 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt WO Ss 4 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 17 Q What is wrong with this on A CAUTION You can be seriou
346. ou will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 1 28 Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly A CAUTION Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time
347. ough flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips e Turn on your low beam headlamps not just your parking lamps to help make you more visible to others e Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 53 4 33 City Driving pou s m LE p he TIT TI A us syle J trees lt r i DANAK Ze ZE eNe F p7 a gt SAN LL p A gt gt ZIPS Zo 7 y A 7 Be 10 One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 4 34 Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are go
348. our e vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds FN Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the airbag system may not be working properly The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If there is a problem with the airbag system in your vehicle the Service airbag message will appear on the DIC display See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information 3 37 Charging System Light When you turn the key to ON or START this light will come on briefly to show that the generator and battery charging systems are working properly If this light stays on your vehicle needs service You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once To save your battery until you get there turn off all accessories 3
349. our vehicle 4 39 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You will have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful 4 40 What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 and Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 44 Also see Winter Tires under Tires on page 5 53 Your anti lock brake system ABS improves your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have ABS you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock Brake System ABS on page 4 7 e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road e Watch for slippery spots The road might
350. our vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Also your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadieny manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors recommends against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another co
351. owever if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles 16 km from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires warranty repairs reimbursement of public transportation expenses may be available for up to a maximum of five days In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available up to a five day maximum Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum amount per day and must be supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges
352. owiedwancentaneadeedesradeneed 5 16 Pressure Lightseieisidaann a ai 3 45 Oil Engine Oil Life System cece ees 5 22 Older Children Restraints ceeeeeee es 1 28 Online Owner Center ccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 7 4 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 40 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeees 3 6 Outlet Adjustment cece ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 30 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ccecce 2 39 Convex Mirror cccececeeceee tense eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 39 Curb View Assist Mirror 0cceceeeeeeeeeees 2 39 Power Heated Mirrors 0 0cceeeeeeeeeeeee es 2 38 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 31 Owner Checks and Services 0c0eeeeeeeeees 6 9 Owners Canadian ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees ii Panic Brake ASSISH erecciones 4 11 Parade DIMMING vicssccicchsies ortda maesr eigna 3 20 Park AIG os count smette tack avebiat sadeseawtaastae e ins 3 20 Park P SHMUMO MO earme en E 2 30 Shifting QUT Of oicise cishescencauencemecieneateancece gecesi 2 32 Parking ASSISL siering aani a aiaa 3 20 Brake seneso e E aA E E EEEN 2 29 Over Things That Burn cceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 33 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 55 3 32 PASSING cenge preo a a a aaa 4 14 Power Accessory Outlet S e ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eenes 3 23 Door LOCKS rarene meni e
353. owing the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until ENHANCED CHIME VOLUME is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between the normal and loud settings The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Exiting the Personalization Menu To exit the personalization portion of the SETUP menu press the CLR button once you have finished making your selections You will return to the main audio screen If a 15 second time period has elapsed with no selection made the SETUP menu will be exited automatically 3 79 Audio System s Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer driving experience See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 By taking a few moments to read this manual and get familiar with your vehicle s audio system you can use it with less effort as well as take advantage of its features While your vehicle is parked set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if equipped A CAUTION This system provides you with a far greater access to audio stations and song listings Giving extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving ca
354. pers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle s interior When cleaning your vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice f you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the integrated radio antenna and the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in your vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning your vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle s glass Should it become necessary you can also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove odors from your vehicle s upholstery 5 87 Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners or techniques Never use a knife or any other
355. pletely You should make sure that the door is closed completely Lift Gate Ajar When this message appears on the display it means that the liftgate was not closed completely You should make sure that the liftgate is closed completely Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine Notice lf you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 16 for more information A multiple chime will sound when this message is displayed 3 61 Passenger Door Ajar When this message appears on the display it means that the passenger s side front door was not closed completely You should make sure that the door is closed completely Right Rear Door Ajar When this message appears on the display it means that the passenger s side rear door was not closed completely You should check to make sure that the door is closed completely Service AC Air Conditioning System This message appears when the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working Have the climate control system serviced by your GM dealer if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency Service Air Bag There is a problem with the airbag system when t
356. r 2 is pressed If a customized name is not programmed the system will show DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 to correspond with the numbers on the back of the remote keyless entry transmitters To program a name use the following procedure 1 Enter the Personalization menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Select the PERSONALIZATION NAME menu item by pressing the TUNE SEL knob once You will see a cursor on the screen 3 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until you reach the first letter you want The letter will be highlighted There is a complete alphabet with both upper and lower case letters and the numbers zero through nine Also included are spaces and other non letter characters such as the ampersand amp 4 Press the TUNE SEL knob once to select the letter The letter will then appear on the display If you make a mistake press the CLR button This will exit the menu You can then go back into the menu and edit the name You can also press the TUNE SEL knob repeatedly to cycle through all the characters until you reach the character you wish to change 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the name you want is complete You can program up to 16 characters The name you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Configure Display Keys This feature allows you to customize the functions of the fou
357. r soft keys located to the left and right of the audio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys under Radio with CD on page 3 82 for programming information 3 67 Remote Recall Memory If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed seat adjustable pedals and mirror controls when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until REMOTE RECALL MEMORY is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name 3 68 If this feature is selected Remote Exit Recall or Key in Recall Memory cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Remote Exit Recall If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will hav
358. r this feature is located on the overhead console Slide the lever toward the symbol to brighten the lights or away from it to dim them If you slide the lever all the way toward the symbol past the resistance point the interior lamps will come on To turn them off slide the lever back toward the minimum brightness setting Entry Lighting The entry lighting system turns on the reading and dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp control when a door is opened or if you press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button If activated by the transmitter the lighting will remain active for about 25 seconds The entry lighting system uses the light sensor it must be dark outside in order for the lamps to turn on The lamps turn off about 25 seconds after the last door is closed They will dim to off if the ignition key is turned to ON or immediately deactivate if the power locks are activated 3 19 Parade Dimming This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel displays and backlighting during daylight hours when the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on This feature operates with the light sensor and is fully automatic When the light sensor reads darkness outside and the parking lamps are active the instrument panel displays can be adjusted by sliding the instrument panel brightness lever toward the symbol to brighten or away from the symbol to dim the lighting Reading Lamps The
359. re all important It can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight 4 53 Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle Maximum Package Trailer Weight GCWR 2 000 Ibs 6 853 Ibs V92 4 250 Ibs 9 353 Ibs 1 928 kg 4 242 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 4 54 In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gro
360. re using the correct key if so is it all the way in If it is then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard Turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of these works then your vehicle needs service 2 22 A OFF This is the only position in which you can insert or remove the key This position locks the ignition steering wheel and transmission It is a theft deterrent feature B ACCESSORY This position allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off This position will allow you to turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel C ON This position is for driving If your vehicle has an automatic transmission and you turn off the engine the transmission will lock If you need to shift the transmission out of PARK P the ignition key has to be in ON D START This position starts the engine Steering Column Ignition Lock Release If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low voltage you can still release the ignition lock and remove the key Use the following procedure to release the steering column 1 Locate the plastic screw head on the underside of the plastic cover for the steering column 2 Insert a flat thin object into the slot and turn it until the plastic piece detaches from the steering column cover 3 Insert a narrow pointed o
361. reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of liquors like whiskey gin or vodka It is the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks The law in most U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we have seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All dri
362. reading lamps are located on the overhead console These lamps come on automatically when any door is opened For manual operation press the button next to each lamp to turn it on Press it again to turn the lamp off If the reading lamps are left on they automatically shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off 3 20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA Your vehicle may have the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system It is designed to help you park while the vehicle is in REVERSE R It operates only at very low speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h URPA can help make parking easier and help you avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles The URPA system can detect objects up to 5 feet 1 5 m behind the vehicle and tell you how close these objects are from your rear bumper The URPA display is located inside the vehicle above the liftgate glass It has three color coded lights that can be seen through the rearview mirror or by turning around A CAUTION Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist system the driver must check carefully before backing up The system does not operate above typical backing speeds of 3 mph 5 km h while parking And the system does not detect objects that are more than 5 feet 1 5 meters behind the vehicle So unless you check carefully behind you before and when you back up you could strike children pedestrians bicyclists or pets behind you and t
363. ready to assist you with directional control of the vehicle if needed Starting Disabled Remove Key This message will appear when the vehicle theft deterrent system detects that an improper ignition key is being used to try to start the vehicle Check the ignition key for damage If it is damaged it may need to be replaced If it is not damaged remove the key and try to start the vehicle again If it still does not start try another ignition key or have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Starting Disabled Throttle Problem This message appears when your vehicle s throttle system is not functioning properly Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Theft Attempted This message is displayed if the content theft deterrent system has detected a break in attempt while you were away from your vehicle Top Speed Fuel Cut Off This message will appear when the Engine Control Module ECM detects that the maximum speed for your vehicle has been reached Your vehicle s top speed is based on the top speed rating of the tires This ensures that your vehicle stays in a safe operating range for the tires Traction Engaged This message will appear when the traction control system is actively limiting wheel spin Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed so adjust your driving accordingly The message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limiting wheel
364. ress the knob to select the menu item Status of Vehicle Systems You can view the status of several vehicle systems using the DIC Vehicle Information Menu To access this menu press the up or down arrow on the INFO switch located to the right of the display The following items are available when the ignition is in ON These items will not be available when the ignition is in ACCESSORY The tire pressure menu items are only available if your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM System e OUTSIDE TEMP e MI TRIP A KM TRIP A e MI TRIP B KM TRIP B e MILES RANGE KM RANGE e MPG AVG L 100 KM AVG e MPG INST L 100 KM INST e GAL FUEL USED L FUEL USED e AVG MPH AVG KM H TIMER e BATTERY VOLTS e ENGINE OIL LIFE e TRANS FLUID LIFE e PSI LF TIRE KPA LF TIRE e PSI RF TIRE KPA RF TIRE e PSI RR TIRE KPA RR TIRE e PSI LR TIRE KPA LR TIRE e BLANK LINE These items can be reset Each one must be reset individually For a detailed description of the menu items and how to reset them see Vehicle Information Menu Item Descriptions later in this section You can view any of these items at any time but only one item can be displayed at a time 3 49 Vehicle Information Menu Item Descriptions The following paragraphs contain a more detailed description of each menu item OUTSIDE TEMP If you select this item the current outside temperature is displayed at the top of the screen I
365. right of the screen The display will return to zero MPG INST L 100 KM INST If you select this item the current fuel economy is displayed This number reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and will change frequently as driving conditions change Unlike average fuel economy this menu item cannot be reset GAL FUEL USED L FUEL USED If you select this item the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item is displayed To reset GAL FUEL USED L FUEL USED press the CLR button located to the right of the screen The display will return to zero AVG MPH AVG KM H If you select this item the average speed of the vehicle is displayed in miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this menu item To reset AVG MPH AVG KM H press the CLR button located to the right of the screen The display will return to zero TIMER If you select this item a timing feature is displayed The timer functions like a stopwatch in that you can record the time it takes to travel from one point to another To turn on the timer press the CLR button located to the right of the screen once The display will read 00 00 00 TIMER ON and begin counting To turn off the timer press the CLR button again When the timer is off the display will show the timer value and TIMER OFF The timing
366. ring Wheel Controls Audio 65 3 111 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel ceeeeeeeeee 3 7 Storage Areas Cargo Management System 0eeeeeeeee 2 48 Cell Phone Storage Area a an 2 46 Center Console Storage Area ceeeeeees 2 46 Convenience Net ceceeeeeeeeeneee een eeeeeneees 2 48 Cu pholder 5 iresi ane 2 46 Front Storage Area ceceeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeneeeees 2 46 GIOVE BOX sona a EES 2 46 Luggage Cafe ienrericicieririri iena e ea 2 47 Stowable Seat ccceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeneeeeeneees 1 9 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 0005 4 43 SUM VISOMS 22 056 2 eaace ear aa cd caease at ERE 2 17 SUNOD f errie noan on iN 2 48 2 50 System Controls DIC ccecceceeneceeeeeeeeeees 3 48 12 Tachometer ceecee teed A EE 3 36 TCS Warning Light ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees 3 40 Theft Deterrent Radio cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 111 Theft Deterrent System cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 2 18 Theft Deterrent Systems cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 2 18 MIMODINIZER so ceccccidedintcnsanmeercarietaesantencemeutens 2 19 Immobilizer Operation eceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 2 20 Throttle Adjustable ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 24 Tilt WHC lc eetacctevaest eteeten ts Heine a 3 7 Tire Pressure LIGht 2 ciccssccsiciesa saci taeeadieseetdeisaeeat 3 41 Dires kea ea a E setts 5 53 Aluminum or Chrom
367. road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 66 5 59 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 68 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 5 60 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do no
368. rom the headlamp lenses The headlamp washers are located to the inside of the headlamps To wash the headlamps press the washer button located at the end of the windshield wiper lever Both the headlamps and the windshield will be washed The headlamps must be on to be washed If the headlamps are off only the windshield will be washed when the washer button is pressed If the washer fluid is low the headlamp washers will not work See Windshield Washer on page 3 10 for additional information Cruise Control These controls are located on the end of the multifunction lever Off This position turns the system off On This position activates the system Resume Accelerate Push the lever to this symbol to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed or to accelerate when cruise is already active w Set Decrease Press this button to set the speed or to decrease the speed when cruise is already active With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous o
369. rong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing press the minus sign to go to the start of the current track if more than 10 seconds have played Press the plus sign to go to the next track If either the minus or the plus button are pressed more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD 3 112 Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button until you hear a beep The CD will fast forward or fast reverse through the CD Press either button again to play the passage If you have the navigation system some of the audio steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing in the navigation radio See the Navigation System manual for more information Radio Reception You may experience frequency interference and static during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations will boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens
370. ruise Control See Cruise Control on lever Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable page 3 12 position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place Turn and Lane Change Signals To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down The lever returns automatically when the turn is complete An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change Hold it there until the lane change is complete The lever returns to its original position when it s released Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or lane change may be caused by a burned out signal bulb Other driver s won t see the signal Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid possible accidents Check the fuse and for burned out bulbs if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 96 for more information Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile 1 6 km a warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal On message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display See Turn Signal On under D C Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Push forward on the turn signal multifunction lever to change the headlamps from low to high beam Pull the lever back and then release it to change from high
371. ry Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints Young children should not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone unless there is no other choice Instead they need to use a child restraint 1 31 A CAUTION People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby does not weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint 1 32 A CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Q What are the different types of add on child A restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only
372. ry hot See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 Tire Pressure Light If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM System this light will come on if the system detects low tire pressure This light will also come on for a bulb check when the vehicle is started See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 62 for more information For more information on the proper tire pressure see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 For more information on your tires see Tires on page 5 53 3 41 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction 3 42 Notice If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after awhile your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs th
373. s 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Immobilizer Operation Your vehicle is equipped with a passive theft deterrent system Cs The system works when you turn the key to ON The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer control unit in your vehicle The correct key will start the vehicle If the key is ever damaged you may not be able to start your vehicle When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not start and the security light comes on the key may have a damaged transponder Turn the ignition off and try again 2 20 If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 96 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service lf your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer who c
374. s Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal Theft Deterrent System The security light is located on the instrument panel cluster If the ignition is off and a door is open the security light will flash reminding you to arm the theft deterrent system To arm the system do the following 1 Lock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock switch 2 Close all the doors The security light will illuminate It should go off within approximately 30 seconds If a door or a liftgate is opened without a key or a remote keyless entry transmitter the horn will sound and the lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds The theft deterrent system will not arm if you lock the doors with a key use the manual door lock or if the liftgate is ajar It activates only if you use the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the following e The vehicle should be locked with the door key or the manual door lock after the doors are closed if you don t want to arm the theft deterrent system e Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter disarms the theft deterrent system Unlocking a door any other w
375. s Center High Mounted SEAT Memory Seat Module BASS Stop Lamp Flasher Module ABS Module Trailer Lamps Universal Garage Door Opener THEFT Intrusion Sensor Diversity HDLP Headlamp Leveling System Antenna Module LEVELING Chassis Sensors Export Only REVERSE ISRVM Inside Rearview Mirror SPARE Not Used LAMP License Plate Lamp Assembly Climate Control Panel CCP SPARE Not Used IGN 3 Heated Seat Modules Air Inlet POSITION Taillamp Assemblies Motor Shifter Assembly LAMP Front Position Lamp Assemblies SPARE Not Used C Icas Cease Electronic Level Control ELC Audio Amplifier ELC COMP Compressor Electronic Level Control ELG Solenoid Electronic Level Control ELC Compressor AUDIO Radio OnStar Module FFS SW Flip Fold Seat Switch Circuit Breakers REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules Power Seat Switches FFSM Flip Fold Seat Module SEAT C B Memory Seat Module 5 102 Rear Underseat Fuse Block Passenger Side PRIMARY QUARTER A C Rear Air Conditioning RELAY MINI SPARE Not Used The passenger s side rear fuse block is located under REAR DEF OG Rear Window Defogger mee RELAY MINI the rear seat on the passenger s side of the vehicle SPARE Not Used The carpet must be lifted up to access the rear fuse block AFTERBOIL To acce
376. s also an interior temperature sensor located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel oS ose XX XK X XAD XK oN Y R W URR OONA NNI Kein Ar ERY 9 XY KY 8 w X LLLE SSISSSSSSSH SS Q O x X gt OO x ay C O A O A A x i i SO x YY O xh si YY Ih cH AK CW X ETA These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the air inside your vehicle then use the information to maintain the selected temperature by initiating needed adjustments to the temperature the fan speed and the air delivery system The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun The recirculation mode will also be activated as necessary Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate control system will not work properly Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity moisture condensing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly There are two modes to clear fog from your windshield Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly VAN Mode Press this button until defog appears on the display 5 Defog This mode directs the air between the windshield floor outlets and side windows When you select t
377. s full e The gage may change when you turn stop quickly or accelerate quickly e It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated that the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank 3 47 Driver Information Center DIC The DIC gives you the status of many of your vehicle s systems It is also used to display driver personalization features and warning status messages All messages will appear on the audio system display If your vehicle has the Base audio system use the information contained in this manual for instructions on operating the DIC for your vehicle If your vehicle has the Navigation system see the Navigation system manual for instructions on operating the DIC for your vehicle 3 48 System Controls Use the following controls located on the audio system to operate the DIC INFO Information Use the up or down arrows on this switch to scroll through the system status information CLR Clear Press this button to clear DIC messages and to reset some DIC displays to zero This button is also used to exit out of a menu See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 and Status of Vehicle Systems on page 3 49 for more information TUNE SEL Select Knob To scroll through the menu items displayed turn the knob located in the lower right corner P
378. s fully released and the brake button on the front of the shift lever while pushing warning light is off before driving the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set Release the button the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move 3 With your right foot still holding the brake pedal To stop the chime fully release the parking brake down set the parking brake with your left foot See If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill Parking Brake on page 2 29 for more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information 2 30 4 Turn the key to OFF 5 Remove the key from the ignition switch and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the key in your hand the vehicle is in PARK P Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you have moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down
379. s not stretched and the borders at the left and right of the picture are blank Full means the horizontal image is stretched across the display and all of the vertical lines are displayed No borders are present Zoom means the horizontal image is stretched up and down the display and the image tends to be stretched at the borders instead of at the middle Borders are not displayed Press the left or right navigation keys up or down to select the display mode Use the Enter key to enter and select adjustments Se Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active 3 106 A Up Press this button to move up the menu list of a DVD y Down Press this button to move down the menu list of a DVD lt Left Press this button to move to the left of the menu list of a DVD gt Right Press this button to move to the right of the menu list of a DVD Enter Press this button to select items within a menu d Audio Press this button to open a menu that will operate only when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc El Subtitle Press this button to open a menu that will operate only when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc Ga Angle Press this button to open a menu that will operate only when a DVD is playing
380. s usual Make sure your instrument panel brightness lever is in the full bright position See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 19 If it s dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control is off a Headlamps Suggested message will appear on the Driver s Information Center DIC display This message informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL are still illuminated Turning the exterior lamp control to AUTO or to the low beam headlamp position will turn off the DRL and cancel the Headlamps Suggested message If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead the DRL will still turn off and the Headlamps Suggested message will be displayed You can turn it off by pressing the OK button if you have the Navigation audio system or the CLR button if you have the Base audio system 3 17 To operate your vehicle with the DRL off turn the exterior lamp control off Then turn on the fog lamps or parking lamps and the DRL will turn off The Headlamps Suggested message will appear on the DIC display This will work regardless of gear position and whether or not the parking brake is set As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Light Sensor The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp feature is located on top of the instrument panel If you cover the sensor it will read dark and the exterior lamps or the Headlamps Suggested m
381. s with the strongest signal The stations will be stored by signal strength not sequential order The set preset station number will appear on the display above the firm key that it is set to Whenever that numbered firm key is pressed for less than two seconds the station that was set will return Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out When battery power is removed and later applied you will not have to reset your radio presets 3 85 PRESETS HOME AWAY This feature gives you the ability to store two different kinds of station presets HOME can be used for stations available where you live and AWAY can be for stations available outside of Setting the Tone Bass Treble To adjust the bass midrange and treble perform the following steps your local broadcasting area To set preset stations for hom e and away perform the following steps i Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until BASS MID TREBLE 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu appears on the display 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until PRESETS 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the tone HOME AWAY appears on the display settings 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select HOME or 4 Press the TUNE SEL knob to scroll through the AWAY will appear on the display settings 4 Press the CLR button to exit the d
382. s you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It is best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover 4 23 Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it is steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you cannot make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Suppose after stalling try to back down the hill and decide just cannot do it What should do Set the parking brake put the transmission in PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled
383. sabled under extreme low temperatures or low battery condition If this occurs the liftgate can still be operated manually If you shift the transmission out of PARK P while the power function is in progress the liftgate power function will continue to completion If you shift the transmission out of PARK P and accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed the liftgate may reverse to the open position Cargo could fall out of the vehicle Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you drive away If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support struts have lost pressure the lights will flash and a chime will sound The liftgate will hold open temporarily then slowly close See your dealer for service before using the liftgate Obstacle Detection Features If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open position After removing the obstruction the liftgate may be power opened or closed normally If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle the power function will deactivate and the liftgate will switch to manual operation The Lift Gate Ajar warning message in the Driver Information Center DIC will indicate that the liftgate is open After removing the obstructions manually open the liftgate to the full open position or close the
384. senger s Side PREO2 CAM Oxygen Sensors CAM Phaser ECM TCM ECM TCM IPC PASS Key IIl Module SPARE Not Used WPR MOD Windshield Wiper Module Assembly SPARE Not Used POSTO2 Post O2 Sensors SPARE Not Used COMP CLUTCH Compressor Clutch Odi ircui FOG LAMP feg Lamps HDLP WASH Headlamp Washer Motor Optional C B OPT Center Console Accessory OUTLET Power Outlet 5 100 Rear Underseat Fuse Block Driver Side ae Brake Lamps SPARE Not Used ELC RELAY Electronic Level Control ELC The driver s side rear fuse block is located under the MINI Compressor Motor rear seat on the driver s side of the vehicle The carpet SPARE Not Used must be lifted up to access the rear fuse block L POSITION Nae sce To access the fuse block push in the two tabs located RELAY MICRO p at each end of the fuse block cover Then lift the R POSITION cover off RELAY MICRO Passenger s Side Position Lamp IGN 3 RELAY Heated Seat Modules Air Inlet MICRO Motor Shifter Assembly STANDING LAMP Control for Position Lamp Relays RLY MICRO SPARE Not Used REV LAMP ISRVM Inside Rearview Mirror RELAY MICRO License Plate Lamp Assembly 5 101 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Se Mon Drivers Heated Seat Module nian Driver s Door Module MEM ADAPT Driver s Power Seat Switch Taillamp
385. sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface Never use a stiff brush It can cause damage to your vehicle s interior surfaces Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Use only mild neutral pH soaps Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while cleaning Damage to your vehicle s interior may result from the use of many organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc 5 88 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For soils always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed e For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean use the following instructions 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water
386. sly hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong place A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 20 A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask
387. spin See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 for more information Trans Transmission Hot Idle Engine This message indicates that the transmission fluid in your vehicle is too hot Stop the vehicle and allow it to idle until the transmission cools down or until this message is removed Turn Signal On If you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile 1 6 km with a turn signal on this message will appear as a reminder to turn off the turn signal A multiple chime will sound when this message is displayed 3 65 DIC Vehicle Personalization Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two people The number of programmable features varies depending upon which model of the vehicle is purchased On all vehicles features such as climate control settings radio preset settings exterior lighting at unlock remote lock and unlock confirmation and automatic door locks have already been programmed for your convenience Some vehicles have additional features that can be programmed including the seat and outside rearview mirror position If your vehicle has the ability to program additional personalization features the driver s preferences are recalled by pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter 1 or 2 or by pressing the appropriate memory button 1 or 2 located on the driver s door Certain features can be programmed
388. spread it out Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and payloads Please note the Certification Tire label on your truck or consult your dealer for additional details A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash e Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to There is also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Off Road Driving on page 4 17 4 49 Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your
389. ss Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If you have a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow And if you tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity If you re using a weight carrying hitch or a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 lbs 1 225 kg at the rear axl
390. ss the fuse block push in the two tabs located RELAY MICRO Afterboil Pump at each end of the fuse block cover Then lift the INT LAMP Hush Panel Lamps Puddle Lamps cover off RELAY MICRO Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly anea Ignition Switch SPARE Not Used RAP RELAY FUEL PUMP MOTOR Fuel Pump Motor RLY MICRO 5 103 Fuses Fuses Hush Panel Puddle Lamps FRT HTD Passengers Heated LAMP Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly SEAT MOD _ Seat Module ay ay mop Passenger s Door Module REAR HATCH Rear Hatch Latch AIR BAG Sensing Diagnostic Module SDM arin dice Kye indet REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Element Shifter Power Sounder Rear ar Rear Fog Lamps Export Only IGN Parking Aid Rearview Mirror RIM SUSPNTN Suspension Module SPARE Not Used TV Tuner Assembly Vehicle SPARE Not Used VICS RAP Information Communication System VICS Module Sunroot f Jcass J Use SPARE SUNROOF MOD Power Sunroof Module Pon inati POWER f SOUNDER Power Sounder Inclination Sensor LIFTGATE Power Liftgate AFTERBOIL Afterboil Heater Pump Circuit DR MOD FUEL E J Door Modules PUMP MTR Fuel Pump Motor PWR C B REAR HVAC Rear Climate Control System 5 104 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information Application aa ere Automatic Transmission a oo selve et
391. ssure on page 5 60 5 58 Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
392. stem is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner For many years add on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle To help reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt system secures the add on child restraint in the vehicle and the add on child restraints harness system holds the child in place within the restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps anda crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side 1 37 When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or ina booklet or both These restraints use the belt system or the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of person
393. stry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Universal Home Remote System Operation Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your Universal Home Remote Transmitter Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming steps Keep the original hand held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section or for assistance see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 4 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door
394. sure warning if non TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 62 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label This label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle 5 67 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this may affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on p
395. t With the anti lock brake system the light will come on when your engine is started and may stay on for several seconds That is normal If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the anti lock portion of the brake system If the red BRAKE light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have anti lock brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 38 If the light stays on turn the ignition to OFF If the light comes on when you are driving stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the light still stays on or comes on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you do not have anti lock brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 38 3 39 Traction Control System TCS Warning Light If the TC traction control warning light comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the traction control system The TC traction control warning light will come on briefly when you turn the ignition to ON If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem The light will also come on if you turn the traction control system off using the TC tract
396. t 250 Ibs 113 kg Example 3 Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs 91 kg x 5 c Available Cargo Weight 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 0 Ibs 0 kg Refer to your vehicle s Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight 4 48 Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR COLD TIRE PRESSURE Cd Ll E BEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION United States version shown Canada similar The Certification Tire label is found on the driver s door edge This label shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle and is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and trailer tongue weight if pulling a trailer The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go toa weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should
397. t you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Do Not Do Not do this or Do Not let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this manual you will find these notices Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words There are also warning labels on the vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics e Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 e Features and Controls in Section 2 e Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 e Climate Controls in Section 3 e Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in Section 3 e Audio System s in Section 3 e Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 These are some examples of symbols that m
398. t automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle Automatic ride control is achieved through a computer used to control and monitor the suspension system The controller receives input from various sensors to determine the proper system response If the controller detects a problem within the system the DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information See your dealer for service Limited Slip Rear Axle Your vehicle may have this feature A limited slip rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle StabiliTrak System Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists you with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between your intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the direction which you are steering When the system activates a Stability System Engaged message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center See DIC
399. t at all If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of the CD and DVD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism 3 113 Diversity Antenna System The AM FM antenna is integrated with the rear quarter glass windows located in the rear of the vehicle on the driver and passenger sides Make sure that the inside surface of the rear windows are not scratched and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surface is damaged it could interfere with radio reception Notice Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception Any damage caused to your antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by your warranty Notice Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear quarter window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may affect your radio s ability to pick up statio
400. t door located on No power The ignition might not be the bottom of the remote control in on or accessory The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light will flash 2 Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 7 T Th hi be off isc will not play e system might be off 3 Close the battery door securely The parental control If the remote control is to be stored for a long period button might have been of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool turned on The power dry place indicator light will flash The system might be in auxiliary source mode Press the MODE button to switch between the DVD player and the auxiliary source The disc is upside down or is not compatible The picture does not fill Press the DISP button on the screen There are the DVD player or on the black borders on the remote control Change top and bottom or on the display mode both sides or it looks stretched out 3 108 Tips and Troubleshooting Chart cont d Recommended Action The disc was ejected but it was pulled back into the DVD player In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls The language in the audio or on the screen is wrong The disc is being stored in the DVD player Press the eject button again to eject the disc Check the signal coming from the a
401. t have enough air under inflation you can get the following e Too much flexing e Too much heat e Tire overloading e Premature or irregular wear e Poor handling e Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following e Unusual wear e Poor handling e Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar below the driver s door latch This label lists your vehicle s original equipment tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the tire and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 45 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the compact spare tire it should be at 60 psi 420 kPa For additional information regarding the compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 5 86 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly in
402. t head restraints also tilt forward and rearward well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly injuries Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash The second row outboard head rests can be adjusted up and down Pull up on the head rest to raise it and push down on the head rest to lower it The second row head rests do not tilt Your second row seat may have a head rest in the center position 1 8 If your vehicle has third row seats the head rests are adjustable up and down and removable Pull up on the head rest to raise it Press the button located at the base of the head rest and push down on the rest to lower it The head rests must be removed before the third row seat can be folded To remove the head rests press the button located at the base of the head rest and pull the head rest all the way out of the seat Store the head rests in the storage compartment behind the third row Open the cover and insert the head rest posts through the slats in the storage area The head rests must be stored with the front of the rest facing up Position and snap the head rests in the provided storage tray Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation Adjusting the Second Row Seat The second row seat can be adjusted forward or rearward Pull up on the lever under the seat cushion and slide the seat with
403. t off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving This off road guide is for vehicles that have all wheel drive If your vehicle does not have all wheel drive you should not drive off road unless you are on a level solid surface Many of the same design features that help make your vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather conditions features lik
404. t will be in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C depending upon whether the system is set for English or metric units If you wish to change the units see DIC Main Menu on page 3 53 MI TRIP A and B KM TRIP A and B For information on the trip odometers see Trip Odometers on page 3 35 MILES RANGE KM RANGE If you select this item the approximate number of remaining miles or kilometers you can drive without refueling is displayed This estimate is based on the current driving conditions and will change if the driving conditions change For example if you are driving in traffic making frequent stops the display may read one number but if you enter the freeway the number may change even though you still have the same amount of gas in the gas tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving 3 50 If your vehicle is low on fuel the Fuel Level Low message will be displayed See Fuel Level Low under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 57 for more information MPG AVG L 100 KM AVG If you select this item the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km is displayed This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset the MPG AVG L 100 KM AVG press the CLR button located to the
405. te for the following situations e Towing Service e Battery Jump Starting e Lock Out Assistance e Fuel Delivery e Flat Tire Change Covers change only e Trip Interruption If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 48 months 50 000 miles 80 000 km warranty period Items covered are hotel meals and rental car Roadside Service Availability Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada an advisor is available to assist you over the phone A dealer technician if available can travel to your location within a 30 mile 50 km radius of a participating Cadillac dealership If beyond this radius we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership Reaching Roadside Service Dial the toll free Roadside Service number 1 800 882 1112 A Roadside Service Advisor will assist you and request the following information e A description of the problem e Name home address home telephone number e Location of your Cadillac and number you are calling from e The model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN mileage and date of delivery Roadside Service for the Hearing or Speech Impaired Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired Cadillac has installed special telecommunication devices called Text Telephone TTY in the Roadside Service Center Any customer who has access to
406. teering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control A CAUTION Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe do not try it you probably will not get through Also water that deep can damage the axle and other vehicle parts If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on your vehicle s ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get the tailpipe under water And as long as the tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start the engine When you go through water remember that when the brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop A CAUTION Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water See Driving in Rain and on
407. that the valve stem is towards the rear of the vehicle This will help when you check and maintain tire pressure in the spare 7 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench until you feel more than two clicks This indicates that the compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened 8 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn the tire B If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on 5 85 Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on the vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have the full size tire repaired or replaced where you want You must calibrate the tire inflation monitor system if your vehicle has this feature after installing or removing the compact spare See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 62 The system may not work correctly when the compact spare is
408. the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until HORN SOUNDS AT LOCK is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If you select this feature to be on Lights Flash At Lock will also be on You can choose Lights Flash At Lock by itself but Horn Sounds At Lock will always have Lights Flash At Lock enabled when it is selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Exterior Lights at Unlock This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds unless a door is opened the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY ON or START or the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personal
409. the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Driver Unlock Key Out This feature allows the driver s door to automatically unlock when the key is removed from the ignition Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until DRIVER UNLOCK KEY OUT is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If this feature is selected Driver Unlock in Park Doors Unlock in Park or Doors Unlock Key Out cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle Doors Unlock in Park The feature allows the doors to automatically unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it
410. the seatback forward for added storage space or when storing a flat tire The other button is the power folding seat button The button behind the second row seat is also a power folding seat button Press and hold either one of the two power folding seat buttons to fold the seat Before folding or unfolding the third row seat all of the following conditions must be met e The liftgate or passenger s side rear door must be open e The unlock button on either the remote keyless entry transmitter or the door must be pressed three times to enable the rear seat for two minutes or the ignition must be in ON or ACCESSORY e The vehicle must be in PARK P e The vehicle cannot have a low battery After the seat has folded the panel on the seat must be folded forward to create the flat floor If the seat s path is blocked it will stop and back away Press the button again to return the seat to its previous position Before returning the third row seat to the passenger seating position the panel must be folded back upon itself Press and hold one of the power folding seat buttons and the seat will unfold into the seating position If the seat is not unfolded fully into the seating position a chime will sound when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK P This indicates that the seat is not ready for a passenger Replace the head rests Safety Belts A CAUTION Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This part of the manual te
411. the vehicle It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off The air conditioning compressor also comes on Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and will automatically turn off after 10 minutes when defog is selected Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause the air inside your vehicle to become too dry or stuffy To prevent this from happening after the air in your vehicle has cooled turn the recirculation mode off ApwRV Power Driver s Temperature Press the PWR button located on the driver s side of the climate control panel to turn the entire climate control system on or off Press the up or down arrow on the switch to increase or decrease the temperature inside your vehicle ApwRV Power Passenger s Temperature Press the PWR button located on the passenger s side of the climate control panel to turn the passenger s climate control system on Press the up or down arrow on the switch to increase or decrease the temperature for the front passenger A C OFF Air Conditioning Press this button to manually turn off the air conditioning compressor Press AUTO to return to automatic operation or press the A C OFF button again 3 27 Sensors There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel near the windshield 3 28 There i
412. the volume of the headphone connected to the right headphone jack Playing a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player will continue loading the disc and the player will automatically start if the vehicle is in ON ACCESSORY or when RAP is active If a disc is already in the player press the play pause button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote control Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of the copyright information or the previews Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished If the DVD does not begin to play the main title refer to the on screen instructions Stopping and Resume Playback To stop playing a disc press and release the stop button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control To resume playback press the play pause button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control The movie should resume play from where it was last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice If the disc has been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed twice the disc will resume play at the beginning 3 103 Ejecting a Disc Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to eject the disc There is not an eject button on the remote control If a disc is ejected from the player but is not removed the DVD player will reload the disc within 25 to 30 seconds
413. tighten the belt pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 50 Airbag System Your vehicle has six airbags A frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal airbag for the right front passenger e a seat mounted side impact airbag for the driver and another for the right front passenger e aroof mounted side impact airbag for the driver and passenger directly behind the driver and e aroof mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger and the person seated directly behind that passenger The roof mounted side impact airbags are designed for either side impact or rollover deployment Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating airbag But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Wearing
414. times walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if am wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted Q If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear Safety belts or the safety belts A Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every airbag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in fr
415. ting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 if equipped can be programmed on the six numbered firm keys by performing the following steps 1 2 3 4 Turn the radio on Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM or XM1 or XM2 Tune in the desired station Press and hold one of the six numbered firm keys for two seconds until you hear a beep The set preset station number will appear on the display above the firm key that it is set to Whenever that numbered firm key is pressed for less than two seconds the station that was set will return Repeat the steps for each firm key To set the preset stations with an equalization setting DSP setting or a PTY setting see each of these features later in this section When a preset station is selected once one of these additional settings is selected the preset station will remember each setting and it will remain active until the setting is selected off for that preset station AUTOSTORE PRESETS To set the preset stations automatically perform the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM 3 4 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until AUTOSTORE Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu PRESETS appears on the display Press the TUNE SEL knob to select AUTOSTORE will appear on the display The radio will automatically search the band and select and store the six radio station
416. tion and Rotation on page 5 65 and Tires on page 5 53 Notice Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors 5 63 TPM Sensor Identification Codes Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code Any time you replace one or more of the TPM sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position Each tire wheel position is matched to a sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order left front LF right front RF right rear RR and left rear LR You will have one minute to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than one minute to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you will need to start over The TPM matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON with the engine off 3 Using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock and unlock the vehicle s doors 5 64 Press the lock and unlock buttons at the same time on the RKE transmitter A single horn chirp will sound indicating that the TPM system is ready and the sensor matching process can begin Start with the driv
417. to low beam If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on the high beams will be on the next time you start your vehicle This light on the instrument panel cluster will be on indicating high beam usage Flash to Pass This feature allows you to use the high beam headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass Pull and hold the turn signal multifunction lever toward you to use this feature When you do the following will occur e If the headlamps are off in low beam or in Daytime Running Lamps DRL mode the high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever there Release the lever to turn them off e If the headlamps are in high beam mode they will switch to low beam To return to high beam push the lever away from you Windshield Wipers The lever on the right side of the steering column operates the windshield wipers w Mist Pull the lever down and release it for a single wiping cycle The lever will return to its original position For more cycles hold the lever down before releasing it O Off Put the lever in this position to turn off the wipers SJ Delay Put the lever in this position to set a delay between wipes Turn the delay adjustment band to set the length of the delay 4 Delay Adjustment Use this band to set the length of the delay between wipes when using the delay feature The closer you move the band toward mist
418. to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until KEY IN RECALL MEMORY is highlighted 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If this feature is selected Remote Recall Memory cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 3 69 Auto Exit Seat If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed exit position for the driver s seat when the key is removed from the ignition and the driver s door is opened Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP menu following the instructions listed previously 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until AUTO EX
419. try reducing the treble on your radio FM Stereo FM stereo will give the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada if available Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of XM signal for a period of time The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference is an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Care of Your CDs and DVDs Handle CDs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly or no
420. try to go straight up e Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there e Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic A CAUTION Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert Q What should I do if my vehicle stalls or is about A to stall and cannot make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here is what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you will need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R A
421. ts 1 23 Rear Windshield Washer Wiper 2 0eee 3 11 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with ONS tae ae 2 35 10 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with OnStar and Compass ccccesssseeeeeeeeeees 2 35 Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 1 5 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Recovery HOOK ji cicetcie nen iianeewsnestandentaneneeaza nds 4 44 Recreational Vehicle Towing cecene 4 50 Remote Keyless Entry System c eeeeeeeeeeees 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation 2 5 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire ccsiecciectanse stein cede see na aa cee 5 76 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 74 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 14 General Motors ccceeceeeeeeneeeeen eee eeneeeeenes 7 15 United States Government eeeeeeeeeeee 7 14 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 00 1 62 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crashen e necenaeh E 1 63 Retained Accessory Power RAP ccecce 2 23 Right Front Passenger Position Safety Belts 1 23 Roadside SENICE eeii e ar ete dad asichiadeanSeacetsas Mas 7 6 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 0 4 44 Running the Engine While Parked 4 2 34 Safety Belt PretenSIONenS zaisscsaeics ionii o a 1 28 Reminder
422. u the help you need 2 40 Acomplete OnStar User s Guide and the Terms and Conditions of the OnStar Subscription Service Agreement are included in the vehicle s glove box literature For more information visit www onstar com or www onstar ca Contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or press the OnStar button to speak to an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be found at www onstar com or www onstar ca OnStar Services The Directions and Connections Plan is included on new vehicles for the first year from the date of purchase You can extend this plan beyond the first year to meet your needs For more information press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Directions and Connections Plan Advanced Automatic Collision Notification Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking AccidentAssist Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert Remote Diagnostics Online Concierge Driving Directions RideAssist Information and Convenience Services OnStar Personal Calling As an OnStar subscriber the Personal Calling capability allows you to make hands free calls using a wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice commands with no additional contracts and no additional roaming charges To find out more about
423. uld be addressed to Cadillac s Customer Assistance Center United States Customer Assistance Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 1 800 458 8006 1 800 833 2622 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Fax Number 313 381 0022 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Fax Number 313 381 0022 From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 888 446 2000 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program EIMOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelc
424. untry outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the passenger s side of the vehicle To open the fuel door press on the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door A CAUTION If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burn
425. upported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM parts If you want to purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 tells you what should be checked when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition 6 3 The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 When your vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine GM parts Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on it means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally you must service your vehicle within 3 000 miles
426. ur area of vision especially if you are following a larger vehicle Also you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle D
427. urable Radio Display Keys This feature allows you to customize the four keys that are located on each side of the radio display to make it easier to adjust the radio features and other non radio related features are also available for customization To program the configurable radio display keys perform the following steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until SETUP appears on the display 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter into SETUP 4 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display 5 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter into CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS 6 Turn the TUNE SEL knob to select which of the four configurable keys you would like to change The currently assigned feature will be shown 7 Press the TUNE SEL knob to select the configurable key to change 3 97 8 Turn the TUNE SEL knob to find the feature that you would like to store to the key 9 Press the TUNE SEL knob when you have found the feature to be stored The display will update by showing the symbol of the feature that you selected next to the configurable key 10 Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key Once a feature is programmed to a key the feature will not appear on the display when programming the remaining configurable keys The configurable keys can be changed at any time Navigation Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system
428. ut the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer can check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed 3 44 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical em
429. uxiliary device and make sure that the connection and the signal is good Change the Video Format to PAL or NTSC See Stereo RCA Jacks previously for how to change the video format Press the MENU button on the DVD player or on the remote control and change the audio or language selection on the DVD menu Tips and Troubleshooting Chart cont d Recommended Action The remote control does not work After stopping the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning Point the remote control directly at the infrared window below the video screen while using Check that the batteries are not dead or put in wrong The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light will flash If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player will resume playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player will begin to play from the beginning of the DVD 3 109 Tips and Troubleshooting Chart cont d Recommended Action The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound My disc is stuck in the player The Load Eject button does not work 3 110 Press the MODE button to change from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary source mode Check to make sure that the auxiliary source is connected to the inputs properly Press the eject load button on the DVD player
430. vehicle when it is supported only yet using the wheel wrench Turn the handle by a jack about 180 degrees then flip the handle back to the starting position This avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn 5 76 A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire 4 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift head until the jack just fits under the vehicle 5 Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the metal flange located behind the triangle on the plastic molding as shown Notice Using a jack to raise the vehicle without positioning it correctly could damage your vehicle When raising your vehicle on a jack be sure to position it correctly under the frame and avoid contact with the plastic molding 6 Put the compact spar
431. vers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up I will be careful is not the right answer What if there is an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking A CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal
432. ways sounds the same at the set volume level This feature is most effective at lower radio volume settings where background noise can affect how well you hear the music being played through your vehicle s audio system At higher volume settings where the music is much louder than the background noise there may be little or no adjustments by AVC To turn AVC on and off perform the following steps 1 Press the TUNE SEL knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the TUNE SEL knob until AUTO VOLUME COMP appears on the display 3 83 3 Press the TUNE SEL knob to turn AVC on or off An X will appear in the box when AVC is selected on 4 Press the CLR button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the CLR button or wait for the display to time out SOURCE Press this button to select a source either radio or CD The CD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD will appear on the display if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display will not change from the radio source Finding a Station BAND Press this button to select FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 if equipped A SEEK V Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there SEEK will appear on the display The sound will mute while seeking The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band A SCAN Press the SCAN button to enter scan mode SCAN will
433. well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving e Have your vehicle in good shape for winter e You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Also see Tires on page 5 53 Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in y
434. wer Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake to keep your speed down Applying the brake will take you out of cruise control If you need to apply the brake due to the grade of the downhill slope you may not want to attempt to use your cruise control feature 3 15 Ending Cruise Control To end a cruise control session step lightly on the brake pedal Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruise control session only Move the cruise control switch to off to turn off the system completely Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set soeed memory is erased Headlamps The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the turn signal multifunction lever 0 Exterior Lamp Control Turn the control with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has four positions bd On Off Turn the control to this position to turn off all lamps except the Daytime Running Lamps DRL
435. will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located in the center of the instrument panel Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key is not in Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals will not work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering wheel pad to sound the horn Tilt Wheel Turn Signal Multifunction Lever A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following e Turn and Lane Change Signals See Turn and Lane Change Signals on page 3 8 e 3 Exterior Lamp Control See Headlamps on page 3 16 e 2D iD Headlamp High Low Beam Changer See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 e Flash To Pass Feature See Flash to Pass The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is on page 3 9 located on the left side of the steering column e 0 Fog Lamps See Fog Lamps on page 3 18 To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the e C
436. wn firmly and let the system work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal The brakes will return to normal operation after the brake pedal has been released All Wheel Drive AWD System If your vehicle is equipped with this feature engine power is sent to all four wheels all the time This is like four wheel drive but it is fully automatic Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both contr
437. wn to 34 F 37 C e Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protect against rust and corrosion e Help keep the proper engine temperature e Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at the first maintenance service after each 25 000 miles 41 500 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which will not damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do not need to add anything else A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badl
438. y For how often to change the passenger compartment air filter see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The passenger compartment air filter is located underneath the hood below the windshield wiper arm on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location Use the procedure listed below to replace the passenger compartment air filter 1 Open the hood to access the engine compartment See Hood Release on page 5 11 for more information Locate the passenger compartment air filter access panel door 3 32 Push the two tabs on the access panel door towards the windshield While pressing forward lift the access panel out of the clipped position and pull towards the front of the vehicle This releases the clips and allows the panel door to be removed Remove the old filter and insert a new one Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward the passenger compartment See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 for the correct part number for the filter Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your
439. y ae pasve at O O Ek Engine Oil with Filter All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling 5 105 Engine Specifications engine Wn coe Spark Plug Gap 3 6L V6 LY7 0 044 inches 1 1 mm LH2 4 6L V8 0 040 inches 1 0 mm 5 106 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule 0 ceeeeeeeeneees 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 6 9 IMMOCUCHION Seo s05 ica oeewpnereeteddacmdhael sibdeues dan sek deacons 6 2 At Each Fuel Pill onic cccccte acesnag etedise cdieeesteee dere 6 9 Maintenance Requirements seeeeeeeee ee 6 2 At Least Once a Month o n 6 9 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year accessere 6 10 Using the Maintenance Schedule 0 6 2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 6 4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Additional Required Services c eeeeeee eee 6 6 Maintenance Record sceeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeee 6 15 Maintenance Footnotes cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 6 7 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehic
440. y damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a year have your dealer check your cooling system Notice f you use extra inhibitors and or additives in your vehicle s cooling system you could damage your vehicle Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information 5 27 Checking Coolant A CAUTION Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the surge tank Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the side to the horizontal mark The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on the driver s side of the vehicle toward the rear of the If the Check Coolant Level message in the Driver engine compartment See Engine Compartment Information Center DIC comes on and stays on Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location it means you are low on engine coolant See DIC Warnings and Messa
441. your body Release the lever and try to move the seat forward and rearward to be sure it is locked into place Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat The passenger s side of the second row seat has an easy entry feature This makes it easy to get in and out of the third row seat if your vehicle has one To operate the seat pull the release handle located on the top of the seatback Fold the seatback forward then pull the release handle on the top of the seatback to release the seat to tumble forward A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked Be sure to return the seat to the original position when finished Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked in place Stowable Seat If your vehicle has a third row seat it is a power folding seat The head rests need to be removed before folding the third row seat See Head Restraints on page 1 7 for instructions for removing the third row seat head rests The seatback will not fold all of the way down if the head rests are not removed Inside Liftgate The buttons that are used to operate the power folding third row seat are located inside of the liftgate and behind the second row seat on the passenger s side of the vehicle Two buttons are located inside the liftgate One button is to tilt
442. your dealer to fix it pal es KS NS SS a SDS Ky ae x c The belt is twisted across the body 1 21 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle 1 22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position on page 1 16 The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up
443. your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Frontal airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes They are not designed to inflate in rollover rear crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal airbags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Seat mounied side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle They are not designed to inflate in frontal in rollover or in rear crashes Roof mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle They are not designed to inflate in frontal or in rear crashes The vehicle is designed to deploy the roof mounted side impact airbags in the event of a vehicle rollover Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 1 51 A CAUTION Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you are too close
444. ystem off if you ever need to Notice Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when the TCS is off You could damage your vehicle s driveline When the TCS is switched off on AWD vehicles you may still feel the system working This is normal and necessary with the AWD hardware on your vehicle You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 44 and lf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 43 for more information See also Winter Driving on page 4 39 for information on using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions To turn the system off press the TC traction control button located near the shift lever TC If you press the TC traction control button once the traction control system will turn off and the traction control system warning light will come on Press the TC button again to turn the system back on If you press and hold the TC button for five seconds the StabiliTrak system and the traction control system will turn off Press the TC traction control button again to turn StabiliTrak back on For more information see StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for more information Magnetic Ride Control Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control tha

Bunn 41343 Coffeemaker User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents